JP2018019784A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving performance property.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 10 comprises: main control means for performing a win/lose lottery as to whether or not a special game state is generated and for generating a special game state when winning the lottery; special display means for performing a variable display indicating a result of the win/lose lottery; performance display means capable of deriving a performance display to be performed synchronously with the variable display of the special display means; and sub control means for controlling the performance display means on the basis of information from the main control means. In the performance display of the performance display means, a result instruction performance for indicating or suggesting a result of the lottery at the last the performance display and a last impression performance which is performed immediately before a result instruction performance are carried out. The length of time of the last impression performance is associated with a winning expectation degree which is an expectation degree to generation of the special game state in a predetermined variable display. The performance display means also has impression time display means capable of deriving an impression time display for indicating or suggesting the length of time in which the last impression performance is derived.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed on the variable display means (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, various effects are derived along with the variable display, and the degree of expectation that the special gaming state will occur (winning expectation) varies depending on what kind of effect is derived for the variable display. It has become.

JP 2006-271480 A

  By the way, there is a constant demand for novelty and diversification of effects performed with variable display.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving performance.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Effect display means capable of deriving an effect display that starts with the start of the variable display of the special display means and ends with the end of the variable display of the special display means;
Sub-control means for controlling the effect display means based on information from the main control means,
In the effect display, a result teaching effect that teaches or suggests the result of the lottery at the end of the effect display, and a last impression effect that is performed immediately before the result teaching effect,
The length of time of the last impression effect is associated with a winning expectation that is an expectation for occurrence of the special gaming state with a predetermined variation display,
Impression time display means capable of deriving an impression time display that teaches or suggests the length of time from which the last impression effect is derived is provided.

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve performance.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows structures, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical structures of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a classification determination process. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a discharge permission command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination | determination information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure change setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure discrimination | determination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decoration design, etc. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows holding information storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding process. It is a flowchart which shows a win display process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the variable display of a decoration symbol in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of the variable display of a decoration symbol in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence of each production | presentation pattern of each scene, and jackpot expectation degree. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence (combination expectation degree discrimination | determination table) of each jackpot expectation degree of the scenes 1 to 3 and the total expectation degree of the scenes 1 to 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence (last scene time discrimination | determination table) with the total expectation degree and the jackpot expectation degree of the last scene, and the time length (determination method) of the last scene. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last scene time lottery table. It is a time chart of the change display in a decoration design display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence of the length of button production, and the length of the last scene. It is a flowchart of a scene grasping process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub effect process.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame as a game board mounting frame is provided on one side of the outer frame 11. The frame 12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed. In FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, game members (nails, accessories, and the like) disposed on the surface of the game board 30, a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as a front frame, and the like are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper side frame constituting portion 11a and a lower side frame constituting portion 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame constituting portion 11c and the right side frame constituting portion 11d are made of aluminum alloy. Each of the frame components 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so that the inner frame 12 can be rotated. As a result, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. And the inner frame 12 etc. are accommodated in the space part formed inside the outer frame 11.

  The right side frame constituting portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, you may comprise the front frame set 14 so that it may be supported by the outer frame 11 so that opening is possible directly rather than via the inner frame 12.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front plate of the front frame set 14 is provided with a lower plate 15 as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion thereof, and the game balls discharged from the lower payout outlet 16 are placed on the lower plate. 15 can be stored. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

  A game ball launching handle (hereinafter referred to as “handle 18”) is provided on the right side of the lower plate 15 as operating means (launching operation means) projecting toward the front side. Note that the handle 18 is provided with a rotary operation body 18a as an operation unit provided so as to be rotatable, and touch as a touch detection means capable of detecting that the handle 18 is touched by a human hand at a position not shown. A variable resistor is provided as an operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the sensor or the handle 18. When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by a launching device 60 serving as launching means described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of pivoting operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a stop lever 18b as stop operation means that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand that holds the handle 18. In the state where the stop lever 18b is pressed, even if the handle 18 is gripped, the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60 is prohibited. Therefore, the rotation of the handle 18 can be performed while prohibiting the launch of the game ball, or the launch of the game ball can be temporarily stopped while the handle 18 is held.

  As shown in FIG. 2, an upper plate 19 that can store game balls paid out from the upper payout outlet 17 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 through the lower plate communication passage 71 and the lower payout outlet 16 described later.

  A lending switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display unit 124 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. In a gaming hall or the like, if the lending switch 121 is operated in a state where a gaming card with a balance is inserted (inserted) into the CR unit arranged on the (left) side of the pachinko machine 10, the operation depends on the operation. The lending balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the CR unit. Also, the balance display unit 124 displays how much of the card is inserted in the CR unit.

  Further, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. The ball removal button 123 is configured to be able to protrude and retract from the upper surface of the upper plate 19 and is always urged to a side protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 19 by an urging means (not shown). When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, the space between the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 is opened, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 19 are guided to the lower plate 15. . That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

  In addition, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 as effect operation means are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. The effect button 125 has a built-in LED, and by pressing the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, a corresponding effect is performed on the decorative symbol display device 42, which will be described later, or the effect content is changed. To do.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game while the light emission mode is changed and controlled according to a change in the gaming state. For example, at the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 that are turned on when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. In addition, a large number of small through holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not attached to a pair of conventional front and rear rectangular glass plates separately in front and rear pairs, but is formed into a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 30 is in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39. Accordingly, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  Further, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding a game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window hole 39. Yes. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is employed as the firing device 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 one by one to the firing position of the launching device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 is provided with a general winning device 31, a variable winning device 32, a first starting winning device 33 a and a second starting winning device 33 b as starting ball entering means, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, and the like. ing. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning holes such as the general winning device 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, etc., it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15 is detected. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

  In the present embodiment, 3 balls are entered when the start winning devices 33a and 33b are entered, 10 balls are entered when the general winning device 31 is entered, and the variable winning device 32 is entered. If there are, 14 game balls are paid out. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 that does not enter the ball only by passing the game ball (not discharged to the back side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out. . In addition, the first start winning device 33a, the general winning device 31, and the through gate 34 are configured so that game balls moving in the game area can always enter or pass, whereas The two-start winning device 33b and the variable winning device 32 are configured to change state between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it cannot enter.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and a game ball that has not won various winning ports such as the general winning device 31 or the like is provided with the out port 36. It is discharged out of the game area. The game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails (game nails) in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls as appropriate, and various members (servants) such as a windmill. ing.

  A variable display device unit 35 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround a decorative symbol display device 42 described later. A pair of left and right entrances 151 are provided in the upper part of the center frame 47, and the game balls that enter the center frame 47 through the entrances 151 are the left and right side parts of the decorative symbol display device 42. Is guided on a stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 through a warp flow path 152 extending vertically along the line. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters the pocket 154 formed at the center back side of the stage 153. . In addition, the pocket 154 communicates with a guide passage 155 that leads to a game area directly above the first start winning device 33a, and a game ball that has entered the pocket 154 will be described later with a relatively high probability. The first start winning device 33a is entered.

  A first start winning device 33a is disposed below the variable display device unit 35. The first start winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening (start winning port) through which a game ball can always win is opened. Note that the first start winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening / closing member that changes the ease of entering a game ball into the first start winning device 33a.

  A second start winning device 33b is disposed below the first start winning device 33a. The second start winning device 33b is a pair of blade members 37 provided so as to be capable of rotational displacement adjacent to the left and right sides of the winning opening (start winning port) of the second start winning device 33b in which a game ball can enter. It has. In the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position extending vertically, there is no room for the game ball to pass between the tip of the blade member 37 and the first start winning device 33a. The second start winning device 33b is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be entered. On the other hand, by changing the blade member 37 to the open position that opens outward, a gap through which the game ball passes between the blade member 37 and the first start winning device 33a is secured, and the second start winning device 33b The ball is allowed to enter, and the game ball moving to the side of the second start winning device 33b by the blade member 37 is in the open state guided to the start winning port of the second start winning device 33b.

  As will be described in detail later, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b include a first condition winning detection switch 224a serving as a start condition detecting means and a condition establishment detecting means for detecting a winning game ball, respectively. A second start winning switch 224b is provided. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switches 224a and 224b, whether or not to generate a jackpot state as a special gaming state in which the variable winning device 32 is opened is performed, and the like is described later. The special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 are configured to perform variable display. And, when winning in the winning / losing lottery, a big hit state will be given.

  A variable winning device 32 is provided below the second start winning device 33b. The variable prize winning device 32 is configured to receive a big prize opening leading to the back of the game board 30, a shutter for opening and closing the big prize opening, a big prize opening solenoid for operating the shutter, and a game ball that has entered the big prize opening. And a count switch 223 for detection, and the variable winning device 32 (large winning port) is switched between the closed state and the open state by driving and controlling the large winning port solenoid and opening and closing the shutter.

  The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be won in the big hit state. It should be noted that the large winning shutter of the variable winning device 32 according to the present embodiment is pivotally supported along the lower edge of the large winning opening so that the lower edge of the large winning shutter is rotatable, and the variable winning device 32 is closed. In the state, the big winning shutter extends vertically and closes the big winning opening, so that the game ball can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the variable winning device 32, the big winning shutter rotates forward and extends back and forth (the upper surface is inclined slightly downward toward the rear), and the game ball flowing down to the front of the big winning opening. Is received on the back side (upper surface) of the big prize shutter and guided to the big prize opening.

  A through gate 34 is arranged in an area located on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 (left side area) and an area located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 (right side area) in the game area. ing. The through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 that can detect a game ball passing through the through gate 34.

  In addition, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball support support lottery (open lottery) for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is opened is performed, and a normal symbol display device 41 is also provided. The variation display for teaching the result of the pitching support lottery is performed. If the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

  In the present embodiment, there are a “low probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the winning lottery and a “high probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the winning lottery. Furthermore, the “high pitched state” as the second pitched state in which the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is released relatively frequently and the game ball can easily enter the second start winning device 33c, There is a “low entry state” as the first entry state in which the time zone during which the blade member 37 is opened is reduced as compared to the high entry state. Hereinafter, the low probability state and the low entry state are referred to as “normal mode”, and the low probability state and the high entry state are referred to as “time reduction mode”. A certain state is referred to as a “latent probability mode”, and a state that is in a high probability state and a high pitching state is referred to as a “probability change mode”.

  Note that the high pitched state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low pitched state, and (2) one opening time of the second start winning device 33b ( A state in which the specified time) is longer than that in the low entry state, and (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per one opening of the second start winning device 33b is larger than in the low entry state, (4) A state in which the number of times the second start winning device 33b is released per winning of the winning support lottery is larger than that in the low entering state, (5) the winning probability of the winning support lottery is lower than in the low entering state. And so on. The high pitched-in state in the present embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), (4), and (5). Of course, not limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “highly-entered state”. . As a result, it becomes easier for the game balls to win the second start winning device 33b frequently, and the number of times that the winning lottery is executed is increased, and a decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed. .

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal mode, the latent accuracy mode, and the probability variation mode are continued until the big hit state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode is the special display device 43a, even if the big hit state does not occur. When the variable display on 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) set in advance, the display is terminated and the mode is changed to the normal mode.

  In addition, as the jackpot type of the present embodiment, 15 round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “15RS”), 15 round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “15RN”), and 2 round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “2RS”). ) Regarding “15RS” and “15RN”, it means that the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or that eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 after the variable winning device 32 is opened. As a round, it is repeated 15 times before the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, regarding “2RS”, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and is repeated twice, and then the jackpot state ends. In other words, “15RS” and “15RN” are big hits (so-called “hit with big balls”) that can expect a significant increase in game balls during the big hit state, but “2RS” is a big increase in game balls Is a jackpot that cannot be expected (so-called “no jackpot”).

  In addition, “probability change mode” is given after the jackpot state of “15RS”, “latent mode” is given after the jackpot state of “2RS”, “time reduction” after the jackpot state of “15RN” is finished “Mode” (in this example, 100 times of variable display) is given.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where “small hit” is won in the winning / notting lottery based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a. In the winning lottery based on the winning to the first start winning device 33a, in the case of a small hit, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and it is repeated twice, The small hit state ends. That is, in the small hit state, the same operation as when the variable winning device 32 is in the “2RS” big hit state is performed. However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. That is, for example, when “2RS” is won in the normal mode, the mode is shifted to the latent mode, but the normal mode is continued even if the small win is won in the normal mode. Thereby, in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first start winning device 33a, the variable winning device 32 can be obtained without performing the allocation such as winning the two round big hit (two round normal big hit) to which the high probability state is not given. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is always known that the state has been shifted to a high probability state by being opened twice.

  In addition, a special display adjacent to the upper right part of the substantially elliptical gaming area is displayed with a variable display for teaching the result of the winning / losing lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. First display device 43a as a means and second display device as a special display means for performing variable display for teaching the result of a lottery determination performed when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b When there is a game ball entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the variable display on the special display device 43b and the special display devices 43a and 43b, the fact that the variable display corresponding to the pitch has been stored on hold. The first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b as the hold display means to be shown, and a change for teaching the result of the entrance support lottery performed based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 The normal symbol display device 41 as a normal display means for performing display, and when a game ball passes to the through gate 34 during the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41, the variation display corresponding to the passage is suspended. A normal hold display device 44 indicating that it is stored is provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 will be described later. Display control is directly performed by a main control device 261 as main control means.

  The first special display device 43a is composed of four LEDs (first special figure lamps). Then, the first special display device 43a performs switching display (variable display) of the first special figure lamp when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a.

  The second special display device 43b includes four LEDs (second special figure lamps). The second special display device 43b performs switching display (variable display) of the second special figure lamp when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b.

  In addition, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the lottery determination. In other words, the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped (a combination of the special figure lamps that are lit) is associated with various results of the winning / losing lottery, and depending on the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped, As a result of the lottery, that is, “big hit”, “small win”, or “off” is definitely displayed.

  Further, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, any of the jackpot type, that is, “15RS”, “15RN”, and “2RS” It is also taught if there is. Also, there are a plurality of stop modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b that teach various types of big hits, small hits, and misses, and one of them is selected. Is displayed.

  As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, “15RS”, “15RN”, “2RS”, and “2RS” are selected in the winning lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. There is a possibility of winning “Small”, and in the winning / losing lottery performed when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, there is a possibility of winning “15RS” and “15RN”. There is no possibility of winning “2RS” and “small hit”.

  In addition, the stop display in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and is configured so that the next variable display can be started after the specified time has elapsed (after the variable interval). Has been. Further, after the stop display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b, if the next variable display is not performed even after the specified time has elapsed, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43a or the second special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b. The special display device 43b is configured to be switched from a lighting mode indicating a result of the lottery determination to a lighting mode indicating a standby state in which no variable display is performed. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the lighting mode which shows the result of a lottery is maintained as it is.

  Each of the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b includes two LEDs (a first hold lamp and a second hold lamp). In the present embodiment, the variable display based on the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a (hereinafter referred to as “first variable display”) can be held and stored up to four times. Furthermore, the variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b is also configured to be able to hold and hold up to four times.

  For example, when the first variation display is held for one time, the first hold lamp on the left side (inside the game area) is lit, and when the first variation display is held twice. When the left and right first hold lamps are lit and the first fluctuation display is held for three times, the left first hold lamp blinks and the right first hold lamp lights and the first fluctuation When the display is held four times, the left and right first hold lamps flash. When a new game ball wins the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also suspended.

  In the present embodiment, the suspended variation display is basically digested in the suspended order. However, when both the first variation display and the second variation display are suspended, the second variation display is performed. The variable display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by winning in the second start winning device 33b is not fully digested, the first variation display triggered by entering the first starting winning device 33a is performed. It has no configuration. For example, in the state where one first holding lamp is lit, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and one second holding lamp is lit, the first variation display is postponed, First, the second variation display is performed.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (common figure lamps). The normal symbol display device 41 is configured such that, for example, the right-side (game area outer periphery side) general-purpose lamp blinks and is displayed (variably displayed) when the game ball passes through the through gate 34. Yes. Further, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time by the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the lottery support lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped (combination of the lit general-purpose lamps) is associated with various results of the entrance support lottery, and depending on the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped The result of the lottery support lottery is displayed deterministically. For example, “winning” is indicated by lighting both the left and right common lamps, and “off” is indicated by lighting only the left common lamp.

  The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 41, which is displayed based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34, is configured to be able to hold and hold the variable display of up to four times. For example, when the fluctuation display on the normal symbol display device 41 is held once, the normal hold lamp on the left side (inside the game area) is lit, and when held twice, the normal left and right When the hold lamp lights up and is held three times, the left normal hold lamp blinks, and the right normal hold lamp lights and when it is held four times, the left and right normal hold lamps Flashes. In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also held.

  In addition, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 42 which is constituted by a liquid crystal display device and serves as an effect display means capable of displaying decorative symbols. The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to variably display decorative symbols in accordance with the variable display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Furthermore, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by a sub control device 262 and a display control device 45 which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 uses the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. The auxiliary display content is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, upper, middle, and lower three symbol display areas (upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area), and a plurality of types of decorations are provided in each symbol display area. Symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then in order for each symbol display region (for example, upper symbol display region → lower symbol display region → middle symbol display) The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (in the order of the areas). For example, when the occurrence of the big hit state is determined by the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the big hit is made on the first or second special display device 43a, 43b, and the decorative symbol is given on the decorative symbol display device 42. (For example, in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a line on the predetermined active line) Is started.

  In addition, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, as the previous step, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. Will be. In this way, the state where the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. Of course, the occurrence of a reach condition does not necessarily result in a big hit, but may be missed.

  In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display region and the lower symbol display region is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. When it is made (when the doublet is stopped and displayed), a big hit state is given. In addition, in the case of an odd number of eyes, “15RS” occurs, and in the case of an even number of eyes, either “15RS” or “15RN” occurs.

  In addition, the combination of decorative symbols other than the doublet basically teaches “displacement”, but if it is a big hit of “2RS”, the decorative symbol instead of the doublet is specified on the effective line. Are stopped and displayed (a combination of chance symbols, so-called chance eyes). In the present embodiment, for example, a mode in which “3”, “4”, and “1” are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas is a combination of chance symbols.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of performance stages (with different backgrounds, etc.) are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42 as effects that teach or suggest the game mode in which the user is staying. More specifically, a “probability stage” in which it is determined that the user is staying in the probability change mode, a “normal stage” in which it is determined that the user is staying in the normal mode, and a “retraction” which is staying in the time reduction mode. "Stage". That is, when “15RS” is won, the process proceeds to the “probability change stage” after the jackpot state ends. Further, when “15RN” is won, the process moves to the “retraction stage” after the jackpot state ends, and further, when the variable display is performed 100 times in the pullback stage, the process proceeds to the “normal stage”. In addition, in the present embodiment, there is a “precursor stage” that shifts after the end of the “2RN” jackpot state and after the end of the “small hit” state. In the “sign stage”, the background changes slightly compared to the normal stage, etc., and the effect balance or effect content changes (for example, an effect pattern that is usually difficult to select is easily selected). .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fact that the variable display performed based on the game ball entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (the right to execute the variable display is obtained) is a decorative symbol. The display device 42 is also taught. As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIG. 40, a hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held is displayed in the lower part (hold display area 462) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Yes.

  At the lower part of the left side area and the right side area, a general winning device 31 is arranged along the peripheral edge of the game area. The general winning device 31 protrudes forward from the front surface portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening through which a game ball can always win is opened.

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and a rail 50 that guides a game ball launched from the launch device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 is attached. As a result, the game balls fired in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into a game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4). This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially distal end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52. The game ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion of the game board 30.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launching device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituting portions 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. It is burned.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the lower discharge outlet 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism portion 352 to the upper plate 19. In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball path unit 70 of the front frame set 14 includes the above-described gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. Thereby, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is returned to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Discharged.

  Further, a launch ball passage 74 is provided for communicating between the upper plate 19 and the ball feeding device 63 and guiding the game balls stored in the upper plate 19 to the ball feeding device 63. In addition, a communication hole (not shown) that communicates with the lower plate communication passage 71 is formed in the firing ball passage 74 (or a downstream portion of the upper plate 19), and a first shutter that opens and closes the communication hole (not shown). (Not shown) is provided. The first shutter is always urged toward a closed position that closes the communication hole by an urging means (not shown). Further, the first shutter is configured to be interlocked with the ball removal button 123 and to be displaced to an open position where the communication hole is opened when the ball removal button 123 is pressed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the lower plate 15 is formed with a discharge port 15 a through which the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. A second shutter 15b that opens and closes is provided. The second shutter 15b is always urged toward the closed position that closes the discharge port 15a by urging means (not shown). Further, the second shutter 15b is configured to be interlocked with the ball release lever 25 (for example, connected or integrally formed), and when the ball release lever 25 is pressed (to the left side). Is configured to be displaced to an open position for opening the discharge port 15a.

  3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding a game ball paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by an urging force of a spring or the like so that the outlet of the payout passage 67 is almost closed. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet side rear end of the lower plate communication path 71. In addition, the inlets (sphere inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, each of the inlets and the discharge passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance. A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. For this reason, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball path unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects a game ball located in the lower dish communication path 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower plate communication path 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full using a display or sound on the decorative symbol display device 42 is used. Is controlled. When the game ball stays in the lower tray communication path 71 and the game ball is not detected by the full detection switch (when it is not detected continuously for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. Various control boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up, down, left and right, and partially overlapped in the front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack. Therefore, this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from the back side. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state where they are stacked in front and back. Is attached.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a in which an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning device 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning device 33, and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning ports. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board | substrate box 263 connected with the sealing member becomes a structure which cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch that detects game balls that have entered the various prize-winning ports corresponding to the various prize-winning ports of the general winning device 31 or the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning device 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. The first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. Yes. The first board surface relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 through a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is dispensed (except when it is detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, although illustration is omitted, on the back surface of the game board 30, a solenoid for a big prize opening that opens the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device 32, a solenoid that opens and closes the blade member 37 of the second starting prize winning device 33 b, etc. Is provided. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second panel surface relay board (not shown) for relaying these solenoids and motors to the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism portion 352 for a game ball are integrated. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numerals are given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information relating to the current gaming state (such as jackpot state or probability variation mode), front frame set 14 or inner frame detected by opening detection switches 91 and 92 described later. Terminals for outputting information related to the opening of 12, terminals for outputting information on various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower tray full tank error, a tank ball no error, a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311 Terminals for outputting information on the number of balls are provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion of the substrate box 263 (the left portion in FIG. 5). Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided at the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge part of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover 354, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected, and a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. Has been. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power from the outside. Yes. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and the power switch 382a is switched on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported at the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in FIG. 5) and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the respective winning awards such as the general winning device 31 are gathered through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. In addition, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage portion 217 in the same manner, and the game balls that have not won any winning port are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured separately and can be opened and closed independently. However, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also good to do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the power supply / launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the CR unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state where they are overlapped in the front-rear direction. It has been. The power / fire control device 310 includes a fire control circuit 312 and a power circuit 313, and is housed in the board box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

  Further, the payout control device 311 is housed in the substrate box 311a and fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (power supply / launch control device 310). The substrate box 311a in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 is accommodated, so that the unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. Yes.

  In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply / launch control device 310). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball jam (return to the normal state).

  Further, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 protruding outward from the substrate box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. If you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and hold the power .

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front surface side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the inside is operated by rotating to one side. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  In addition, as described above, the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of outer frame 11, and to operate locking device 600 with the wire etc. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side on the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can move in and out of the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is immersed in the switch main body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off when the detection unit is pressed on the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A main control device 261 as main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip but may be configured as a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501, the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data that will be backed up will be backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process. Conversely, the return of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main process at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, and so on). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display devices 43a and 43b and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

  In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input / output port 505 includes various detection switches such as a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, start winning switches 224a and 224b, a through gate switch 225, and a power source. -Solenoids for opening and closing the various boards such as the launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, the sub-control device 262, the hold display devices 46a and 46b, the normal hold display device 44, the variable winning device 32, and the second start winning device Various electric components such as a motor for opening and closing 33b (blade member 37) are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions.

  A sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during execution, input / output port 554, bus line 555, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555 and a display control device 45 is connected. Further, the speaker SP, the effect button 125, the cross button 126, the annular illumination part 102, the error display lamp 104, and the like are connected to the input / output port 554.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control device. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is taught that the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b controlled by the main control device 261 have won the jackpot, and the sub control device 262 is taught. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by, the decorative symbol variation display is performed as an effect display in accordance with the special symbol variation display in the special display devices 43a and 43b.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured such that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply circuit 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and data can be held (backed up), and all the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is stored. Data is backed up. Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power-off, each register, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned off when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the power failure signal SK1 is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag for which the payout control device 311 is set to allow the payout of prize balls, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer for storing a command transmitted from.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received, and is initially set. It is turned off when it is restored before the process or power shutdown. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing payout of a prize ball, and the main controller 261 having been restored to power. There are three payout return commands to be transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Similar to the payout permission flag, an initial setting process or power-off is performed. It is turned off when returning to the front, and turned off when the command received by the command determination process is determined.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 515, a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a power source / fire control device 310 (fire control circuit 312), a payout device 358, a CR unit connection board 314, and the like are connected.

  The CR unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (lending switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and a CR unit (card reader unit, ball) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The lending unit is electrically connected to the payout control device 311. Information relating to a ball lending operation unit by a player or a ball lending operation to the CR unit is input to the CR unit, and a game value balance is stored in a card which is a recording medium inserted in the CR unit. If so, the balance of the card is subtracted and a payout request signal for the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction is output to the payout control device 311. The recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to the card type, and may be a coin type or a stick type.

  Also, the payout control device 311 periodically sends a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310. (For example, every 2 msec).

  The launch control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60. The firing control circuit 312 is electrically connected to the handle 18, the payout control device 311, and the main control device 261. Further, the launch control circuit 312 is configured so that the dial position signal from the variable resistor indicating the rotation operation amount (rotation angle) of the handle 18 (rotation operation body 18a) is touched from the handle 18 and the player touches the handle 18. The touch signal from the touch sensor indicating that the player is operating and the firing switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b. Further, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to be able to input a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected from the payout control device 311.

  The firing control circuit 312 outputs a firing state signal to the main control device 261 on condition that the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal are input. On condition that the status signal is input, the firing permission signal and the ball feed signal are output to the firing control circuit 312. Main controller 261 is configured to output a firing permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a state where a firing state signal is input.

  The launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball feed device 63 and send the game ball to the launch position when a ball feed signal is input. It should be noted that the ball feeding device 63 is provided in the ball feeding device 63 and in a state in which it is detected that the game ball already exists at the firing position by a preparation ball detection sensor capable of detecting whether or not the game ball is present at the firing position. Is not driven (the game ball is not sent to the launch position even when the ball feed signal is received).

  Furthermore, the firing control circuit 312 drives the firing device 60 (launch solenoid) on condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, a CR unit connection signal, (dial position signal), and a launch permission signal are input. It is configured to let you. As a result, the game ball set at the launch position is launched by the launch device 60 with strength based on the dial position signal.

  The power supply circuit 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power via a control device to which they are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 through a bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Generate internal command for VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a success / failure random number counter C1 as a success / failure random number generating means used for success / failure lottery for determining whether or not to generate a big hit state, and a type used for determination of a jackpot type (type lottery). A determination counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not the reach state is generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set an initial value of the failure random number counter C1, a first And the first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2, and the second start winning device 33b used to determine the variation display time of the second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42). The normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the entrance support lottery of whether or not to be used is used. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for reach pattern lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 stores special fluctuation holding areas as holding storage means for storing the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3, and the normal value storing the values of the normal symbol random number counter C4. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variation holding area includes four holding areas (holding first to fourth holding areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal variation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times.

  The special variable reserved area includes a first special variable reserved area, a second special variable reserved area, and one execution area each having four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Yes. In each holding area of the first special variation holding area, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the first start winning device 33a. Stored serially. In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the second start winning device 33b. Stored serially. By adopting this configuration, the variation display (first variation display and second variation display) on the special display devices 43a and 43b can be suspended four times each.

  More specifically, each success / failure random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 695, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (that is, 695) as a closing price, 0 is a lower limit value as a starting price. It is the composition which returns to. Normally, when the success / failure random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the success / failure random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the success / failure random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 695), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the success / failure random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption), and the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area.

  In this embodiment, the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is “7, 307”. In the state (probability variation mode), the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 that is a big hit is 20, and the values are “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two success / failure determination tables as winning value storage means that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot. There are a first winning / failing determination table storing “7, 307” as a jackpot value and a second winning / failing determination table storing “8-16, 308-316” as a jackpot value.

  For example, the type determination counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), the type determination counter C2 returns to 0 that is the lower limit value. The ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to (in this example, the first start winning device 33a and The jackpot type corresponding to which the second start winning device 33b is entered is the same in the jackpot type distribution, so there is one type determination table). Then, when the jackpot is won in the winning / losing lottery, the type of jackpot state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the decided type is given The Rukoto.

  The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. The value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to the lower limit value of 0. In this embodiment, the reach selection state is generated by the variation selection counter C3, and after the reach state is generated with respect to the decorative symbol, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. The final stop symbol after the stop is to draw lots of “reach other than front / rear off” that stops before and after the reach symbol and “complete out” that does not cause reach. In the present embodiment, there is one reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach pattern in the ROM 502. For example, a game ball to the first start winning device 33a is stored in the ROM 502. A first reach determination table that is referred to when determining a reach pattern (in the case of no big hit) based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 acquired by entering the ball and a game ball to the second start winning device 33b It is good also as providing the 2nd reach determination table referred when determining the reach pattern (in the case of no big hit) based on the value of the fluctuation | variation selection counter C3 acquired by the time of the entrance of this.

  The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball has won the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  In addition, one of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 255, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 255), and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 31, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 31), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. In addition, the variation display variation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b is associated with a rough variation pattern (reach pattern such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.) of variation display in the decorative symbol display device 42. If the variation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also determined (the variation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42 that just fits in the variation display variation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b). Is selected). For example, the variation time is determined based on the variation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode in the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined by the variation type counter CS2 (for example, in the case of corresponding to the big hit of 15RS, It may be configured to determine any one of the stop display modes corresponding to the jackpot).

  The counter used for determining the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern is not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate for each model. For example, it is possible to determine the reach pattern of the decorative symbol only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the reach pattern of the decorative symbol by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, the sizes of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and it is desirable that they are values that are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 232, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 232) and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. The normal symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right through gate 34. The number of random numbers to be won in the low entry state is 31, and the range is “1 to 31”. On the other hand, the number of random number values to be won in the high pitching state is 232, and the range is “1 to 232”. In other words, in this embodiment, the ROM 502 support determination table that is referred to in the low support entry lottery support lottery and the high input that is referred to in the high support pitch entry support lottery. A ball support determination table is provided. Then, when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a variable display for a predetermined time, and then (the normal symbol lamps constituting the normal symbol display device 41 blink alternately. After that, it is stopped and displayed in a mode (lighting pattern) corresponding to winning, and the second start winning device 33b is released in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process.

  When there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. Further, in an external output process of a normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311 and a prize ball is given based on the prize ball command (a game ball is paid out). ) Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a start winning process associated with winning the start winning device 33 is executed, and in step S305, a through gate passing process accompanying passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. In subsequent step S306, a firing permission command setting process for performing a process such as transmitting a firing permission signal to the firing control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310 is performed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The RAM 503 has a first hold counter Na that counts the number of first variable display holds triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a, and a second triggered by winning the second start winning device 33b. A second hold counter Nb that counts the number of hold of the variable display is provided. It is also possible to provide a hold total counter that counts the total number of variable displays that are held (the total number of hold of the first change display and the hold number of the second change display).

  In addition, the execution area of each special variable holding area and each holding area include a random number storage area for storing the value of the random number counter C1, a winning random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and a variable selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided.

  Further, in the execution area of the special variation holding area, the first variation display based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a or the second variation display based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b is performed. A variable storage area is provided in which information indicating whether or not is stored. Hereinafter, “the information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area” is also referred to as “the first variation flag is turned on”, and “the second variation display is performed in the variation storage area”. The information indicating “is stored” is also referred to as “the second variation flag is set to ON”.

  First, in step S501, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b is determined based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S510. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S504, addition display processing of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the second variable display by one is performed. That is, when both the left and right pair of second holding lamps are turned off, the left second holding lamp is turned on, the left second holding lamp is turned on, and the right second holding lamp is turned off. If left, both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, and if both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, the right side second hold lamp is lit and the left side second hold lamp is lit. When the second hold lamp on the left side is in a blinking state and the second hold lamp on the right side is in a lit state, a process for blinking both the left and right second hold lamps is performed.

  After step S504, in step S505, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated by the random number update process in step S303 (a result random number counter buffer, a type determination counter buffer, and a variation). Each value stored in the selection counter buffer) is stored in the first area (the success / failure random number storage area, the winning type random number storage area, the reach random number storage area) among the vacant reserved areas of the second special variable reservation area. . After step S505, the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to a big hit or a small win. Details of the success / failure determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, if it is determined in step S506 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area, the jackpot A type determination process is performed to determine the type. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S508, if it is determined in step S506 that the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the deviation is determined based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach at the time of change is performed. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, details of the success / failure determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches either “7” or “307” which is the value stored in the first success / failure determination table. Is determined. Incidentally, “7” and “307” are values that are big hits in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is simplified. However, in actuality, whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “7” is determined, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “307”, and if an affirmative determination is made in either of these determinations, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the process ends after turning on the first success / failure flag in step S5102. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5101, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5103 is the value stored in the second success / failure determination table “8 to 16”. , 308 to 316 ”. Incidentally, “8 to 16, 308 to 316” is a value that is a big hit only in a high probability state (probability variation mode, latent probability mode). In the determination process, in practice, it is determined one by one whether or not the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second success / failure flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is “out” even in a high probability state, in step S5105, whether or not the first special variation holding area is newly stored variation information ( Whether or not it corresponds to the first variation display) is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5106 is the value stored in the small hit determination table “404, 405”. Is determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5106, the small hit flag is turned on in step S5107, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5106, the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5105, the present process is terminated as it is. In other words, the winning lottery performed based on the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b is configured such that there is no possibility of winning a small hit.

  Next, the second type determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first or second success / failure flag is set to ON in the previous / failure determination processing performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5301 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5301 (the possibility of a jackpot state occurring), in step S5302, the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation holding area is referred to the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0 to 11” corresponding to “15RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5303, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, the process ends after the 15RN flag is turned on in step S5304.

  Next, the reach determination process in step S508 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first hit / no-go flag is set in the hit / no-go determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if both the low probability state and the high probability state are jackpots (the jackpot state always occurs), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if a big hit state does not occur at least in a low probability state (there is a possibility of losing), a reach determination table is referred to in step S5402, and a new determination is made. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area coincides with one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “front / rear out of reach”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, in step S5403, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of front / rear out of reach is turned on, and then the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area in consideration of the reach determination table in step S5404 corresponds to “reach other than forward / backward deviation”. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values “2 to 21”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, the non-front / rear flag is turned on in step S5405, and then the process ends.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, if the change display is “completely out” without passing through the reach state, this processing is ended as it is.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S509 following step S508, a process for setting a starting command is performed. The advance command includes variation information (information used to determine the contents of variation display) indicating the results of the success / failure determination processing, the type determination processing, and the reach determination processing, the first start winning device 33a or the first Information indicating which of the two starting winning devices 33b is the variation information triggered by entering the ball is included, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201).

  After the process of step S509, or when a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S510, whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 is determined by the first start winning switch 224a. It discriminate | determines by the detection information of. If a negative determination is made in step S510, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S511, the value of the first hold counter Na that counts the number of variable display holds triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a is the upper limit (in this embodiment, It is determined whether or not it is less than “4”). If a negative determination is made in step S511, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S511, the process proceeds to step S512, and the first hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S513, an addition display process of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the first variable display by one is performed. That is, when both the left and right pair of first holding lamps are in the off state, the left first holding lamp is turned on, the left first holding lamp is in the on state, and the right first holding lamp is in the off state. If left, both the left and right first hold lamps are lit. If both the left and right first hold lamps are lit, the left side first hold lamp is lit and the left side first hold lamp is lit. When the first hold lamp on the left side is in a blinking state and the first hold lamp on the right side is in a lighting state, a process for blinking both the left and right first hold lamps is performed.

  After step S513, in step S514, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are set to the vacant reservation areas (the success / failure random number storage area, the winning type random number storage) of the first special variable reservation area. Area, reach random number storage area). After step S514, the process proceeds to step S515.

  In step S515, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the success / failure determination process have already been described above.

  In subsequent step S516, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area, the jackpot A first type determination process for determining the type is performed.

  Here, the first type determination processing in step S516 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second success / failure flag is set to ON in the previous / failure determination processing performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of a jackpot state), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility that a jackpot state may occur), in step S5202, the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation holding area is referred to by referring to the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0-9” corresponding to “15RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the process is terminated after the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5203.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is set to a value “10” corresponding to “2RS” in consideration of the type determination table. , 11 ". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the process is terminated after the 2RS flag is turned on in step S5205.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5204, the 15RN flag is turned on in step S5206, and then this process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, even if it is a case where it is a case where a big hit state is elected with the ball entering into either the 1st start winning device 33a or the 2nd starting winning device 33b, the ratio with which a high probability state is provided is the same It is. However, when winning the big hit state that will be given a high probability state when the first start winning device 33a is entered as a trigger, it is a big hit without a ball and the latent probability mode is given after the big hit state. There is a possibility of winning “2RS”. On the other hand, when winning the jackpot state where a high-probability state will be given in response to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b, it is always “15RS”.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S517 following step S516, if it is determined in step S515 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area A reach determination process for determining the type of reach is performed based on the value of the selection counter C3. Details of the reach determination process (see FIG. 16) have already been described above.

  After step S517, in step S518, a starting command setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special variation holding area, and then the pass / fail determination process. The type determination process and the reach determination process are executed. However, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area is provided for temporarily storing these counter values when the value of the random number counter C1 is acquired, and for the information stored in the temporary storage area, the determination process, the type determination process, and A configuration may be adopted in which after the reach determination process is executed, the information is stored in the holding area of the corresponding special variable holding area.

  Note that the process of extracting the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 constitutes the discriminant value extraction process, and the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 extracted in steps S505 and S514 is stored in the special variable holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. Further, the function of extracting and storing the value of the random number counter C1 constitutes an information acquisition unit. In addition, the process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 in step S506 and step S515 (step S5101 and step S5103) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first success / failure determination process, and the determination result is obtained. The processing of storing (setting the correspondence flag) in steps S5102 and S5104 constitutes the result storing processing.

  Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step S603, where the normal holding counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S604, addition display processing of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed by one. That is, when both the left and right normal hold lamps are off, the left normal hold lamp is turned on, the left normal hold lamp is on, and the right normal hold lamp is off. Both left and right normal hold lamps are lit.If both left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the right side normal hold lamp is lit and the left side normal hold lamp blinks, and the left side normal hold lamp is flashed. If the lamp is blinking and the right normal hold lamp is lit, processing is performed to blink both the right and left normal hold lamps.

  After step S604, in step S605, a random number related to the success / failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is terminated.

  Next, the launch permission command setting process in step S306 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not a launch permission flag indicating that the launch state signal is being received from the launch control circuit 312 is set to ON. Note that the launch control signal 312 is received when the launch control circuit 312 receives a touch signal from the handle 18, a launch switch signal, and a CR unit connection signal from the payout controller 311. To the main control device 261.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not a firing state signal has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S702, the process is terminated after the launch permission flag is turned off in step S703.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S704 whether or not the value of the firing timer used to measure the game ball firing interval is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S704, the value of the firing timer is decremented by 1 in step S707, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 704, a firing permission signal is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the firing control circuit 312 in step S <b> 705. In subsequent step S706, the firing permission flag is turned off. After step S706, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S708 whether or not a firing state signal has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S708, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S708, the firing permission flag is set to on in step S709.

  In a succeeding step S710, a ball feed signal is transmitted to the launch control circuit 312. In step S711, “300” corresponding to 0.6 seconds is set for the firing timer. Thereby, the game ball is configured to be launched by the launching device 60 after the game ball is reliably set to the launch position by the ball feeding device 63, and the main controller 261 is launched from the launch control circuit 312. In a state where the signal is continuously received, a firing permission signal is transmitted from the main control device 261 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and a game ball is fired by the launching device 60 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. After step S711, this process ends.

  The launch control circuit 312 receives all of the touch signal, the launch switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal from the handle 18 and the payout control device 311 when the launch permission signal is received from the main control device 261. In the case where a positive determination is made, a launching process for driving the launching device 60 (launch solenoid) and launching a game ball is performed. The launch control circuit 312 performs adjustment control of the launch device 60 regarding the launch strength (launch speed) of the game ball based on the dial position signal. Thereby, the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 with the adjusted strength.

  In addition, when the launch control circuit 312 receives a ball feed signal from the main control device 261, the game ball is set at a launch position in the launch rail 61 where the launch device 60 will launch a game ball. If the preparation ball detection sensor for detecting that the game ball is not set at the launch position is confirmed, the ball feeding device 63 is driven to set the game ball at the launch position. Perform ball feed processing.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S401, the CPU 501 stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and performs the NMI interruption process. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait processing is performed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply circuit 313 of the power supply / launch control device 310 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the backup data is cleared (erased). Therefore, the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether or not occurrence information of power supply interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to step S112. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process also proceeds to step S112.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113 and the like). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). That is, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in subsequent step S114. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. In addition, the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared.

  In step S109, a command for returning the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the start winning device 33 updated in the previous normal process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device is executed.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, a variation pattern command, a symbol command, or the like is transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect in accordance with the display performed by the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and the variation mode. Is indicated to the display control device 45 so as to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (variable display).

  The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines a variation display effect pattern and the like based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45 and sound.

  Here, the variation types of decorative symbols will be described.

  “Normal reach” is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened compared to the normal mode even in various reach cases. For example, the fluctuation display time (fluctuation time) from which the normal reach is derived is “12 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent accuracy mode, or “9 seconds” in the probability variation mode and the time shortening mode, “15 seconds”, Or, it is “12 seconds”. Even in the normal mode and the latent probability mode, the first variation display started from the state where four first variation displays are held is also temporarily reduced, and the variation time of the first variation display is reduced. If is a normal reach, it is set to “9 seconds” or “12 seconds”.

  “Super Reach” is a reach in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variation display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. It is a pattern. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the variation display from which the super reach is derived is “25 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent accuracy mode, or “22 seconds” in the “30 seconds”, the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode. Or “27 seconds”. Note that the variation display variation time when super reach occurs may be set to “25 seconds” or “30 seconds” in any game mode.

  “Premium reach” is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character having a pattern different from the super reach, etc. This is a reach pattern in which the player is expected to have a sense of expectation. The variation display from which the premium reach according to the present embodiment is derived has a longer variation time than the variation display from which the super reach is derived, and is the same length in both the high entry state and the low entry state ( For example, 60 seconds).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when “2RS” or “small hit” is won, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with the chance symbol, but the chance symbol is stopped and displayed. A unique variation display (chance variation) is performed. As an example of the chance fluctuation, after the reach state occurs, if the reach is out of front or back or out of front or back, the fluctuation continues even after the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. With the effect, finally, the variable display in which “3”, “4” and “1” are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle and lower symbol display areas is performed.

  In the present embodiment, chances change because there is a possibility that “2RS” and “small hit” may be won only when the winning lottery based on the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a is won. Is also performed almost in the normal mode and the latent mode. In addition, the variation time of the variation display in which “3”, “4”, and “1” are stopped and displayed is “18 seconds” in any game mode.

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that becomes “completely out” that does not reach any reach state is set to “10 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent accuracy mode, and “6 seconds” in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode. Yes.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol. The combination of probability variation jackpot symbol, normal jackpot symbol combination, chance symbol combination, front / rear symbol combination, Six categories of combination and combination of completely out of symbol are designated. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol command.

  If you win a promising jackpot ("15RS" that can be expected to increase game balls) (hereinafter also referred to as "probable jackpot with a ball out"), or a regular jackpot ("15RN" that can be expected to increase gaming balls). , Also referred to as “general jackpot with a lot of balls”), the decorative symbol display device 42 stops and displays the decorative symbol with the numerical symbol in a combination that becomes a doublet. In the present embodiment, in the case of “probable big hit with a ball”, a probable big hit symbol that is a combination of decorative symbols made up of odd numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9 or 2 , 4, 6 and 8, the variable display is stopped for any combination of the normal jackpot symbol, which is a combination of decorative symbols consisting of even-numbered slotted eyes. Usually, the variable display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbol.

  When the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command for the probable change with big ball, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the symbol combinations consisting of any one of the first to ninth symbols as a stop symbol, When a normal jackpot symbol command is received, one of the symbol combinations of 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as a stop symbol.

  In addition, when winning a winning jackpot ("2RS", hereinafter also referred to as "progressing jackpot without bonus") in which an increase in game balls cannot be expected, the decorative symbol display device 42 will display "3" / " The combination of 4 ”and“ 1 ”chance symbols will be stopped. The combination of chance symbols in this embodiment is one type.

  The combination of front / rear detachment symbols corresponds to “front / rear detachment reach” in which, after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by shifting by one before and after the reach symbol. The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to “reach other than front / rear detachment” in which the final stop symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after reach occurs. The combination of completely missed symbols corresponds to “completely missed” in which even reach is not generated. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops and displays a combination of symbols that are out of front and back, a combination of symbols other than front and back, and a combination of completely out symbols.

  Although details will be described later, the sub-control device 262 determines a combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553 as a stop symbol when receiving these off-line symbol commands. In this embodiment, three commands are prepared for the symbol command for detachment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there is only one symbol command for detachment, and the sub-control device 262 displays a decorative symbol. It is good also as a structure which determines a combination.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, update of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is executed. More specifically, like the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), respectively. To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a special display control process is executed. In this process, control related to the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is performed, and determination of jackpot and setting of variable display in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of this special display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, variable winning device control processing is executed. In this process, control related to the variable winning device 32 is performed. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control related to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

  In step S208, a start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control related to the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) is performed. Details of the start winning device control process will be described later.

  After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. ) Or not. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step S201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step S201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step S211 and step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

  In step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (255 and 31 in this example). Then, the change values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be updated at random and similarly fluctuated. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  If the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the process after step S213 is performed as a power failure process at the time of the power supply interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. To remember.

  Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S217, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  The process in step S209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Further, since the interruption processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the fluctuation interval set after the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is within the period of the fluctuation interval, the process ends after subtracting the value of the fluctuation interval timer in step S802. That is, for example, when the fluctuation interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and “249 (“ 250 ”in the case where step S802 is performed before step S801” is set) ”is set in the fluctuation interval timer. In this process, the value of the variable interval timer is decremented by “1” every 4 msec and becomes “0” after 1 second.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is not a variable interval, in step S803, a hit situation storage area to be described later is referred to in detail, and a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state is currently set. It is determined whether or not there is.

  During the jackpot state, the opening period after the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b until the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. Round period, an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed, and an ending period until the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be started after the final round.

  During the small win state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small hit in the special display devices 43a and 43b is stopped until the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. Round period, an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed, and an ending period until the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be started after the final round.

  In the hit state storage area of the present embodiment, “0” is stored in a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state, and in the big hit state or the small hit state, “1” is stored during the opening period and the interval period. “2” is stored during the round period, and “3” is stored during the ending period. That is, in step S803, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the winning status storage area, and whether or not the big hit state or the small hit state is being determined.

  If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if the big hit state or the small hit state is in effect, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S803, details are given in step S804. Whether the first or second special display device 43a, 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) is performing variable display is determined by looking at the setting state of a special figure display flag to be described later. Specifically, when the special figure display flag is on, it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered that the variable display is being stopped. . As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, and the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. Turned off when the variable display is stopped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, if neither the big hit state or the small hit state is in addition to the variable display, the process proceeds to step S805, where the second start triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b is triggered. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb that counts the number of hold of the variable display is greater than “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if at least one second variation display is held, 1 is subtracted from the second hold counter Nb in step S806. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is held and stored by the determination processing in step S805, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. In other words, even when the first variation display is stored on hold earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is preferentially digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

  In a succeeding step S807, a process for shifting the data stored in the second special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  After step S807, in step S808, the second fluctuation flag of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to ON. In subsequent step S809, a subtraction display process of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease in the number of hold of the second variable display by one is performed. That is, when both the left and right second hold lamps are blinking, the right second hold lamp is lit while the left second hold lamp is blinking, and the left second hold lamp is blinking. When the second hold lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right second hold lamps are turned on, and when both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, the left second hold lamp is turned on. If the second hold lamp on the right is turned off and the second hold lamp on the left is on and the second hold lamp on the right is off, both the left and right second hold lamps are turned off. To perform the process.

  After step S809, in step S810, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if no second variation display is stored on hold, in step S811, the first variation triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a is triggered. It is determined whether or not the first hold counter Na for counting the number of hold of display is greater than zero.

  If a negative determination is made in step S811, the process proceeds to step S812, and both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are in a variable standby state in which no variable display is performed. A standby display setting for deriving a corresponding display mode (for example, a mode in which only the first and second first special figure lamps or the second special figure lamps from the right in the lower row are lit) is performed. That is, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b according to the present embodiment are maintained after the suspension of the fluctuation for the fluctuation interval (in a manner indicating the result of the lottery). However, when the change interval ends, the display mode is switched to indicate that the change standby state is set. After step S812, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S811, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S813. In a succeeding step S814, a process for shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  After step S814, in step S815, the first change flag of the execution area of the special change reservation area is set to ON. In the subsequent step S816, subtraction display processing of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease in the number of hold of the first variable display by 1 is performed. That is, when both the left and right first hold lamps are blinking, the right first hold lamp is turned on while the left first hold lamp is blinking, and the left first hold lamp is blinking. If the first hold lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right first hold lamps are turned on. If both the left and right first hold lamps are lit, the left first hold lamp is turned on. The first hold lamp on the right side is turned off while the left is on. When the first hold lamp on the left side is lit and the first hold lamp on the right side is turned off, both the left and right first hold lamps are turned off. To perform the process.

  After step S816, the variable display setting process is performed in step S810, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special variable reservation area is one, and the data stored in the first special variable reservation area and the second special variable reservation area are displayed when the variable display based on the data is performed. Therefore, it is shifted to a common execution area.

  Here, details of the variable display setting process in step S810 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, a mode storage area to be described later is referred to in detail to determine whether or not a high probability state (probability change mode or latent probability mode) is set. In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, the mode storage area stores any value of “11”, “12”, “21”, “22”, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12”. Corresponds to the time reduction mode, “21” corresponds to the probability variation mode, and “22” corresponds to the latent probability mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is obtained by determining whether or not “21” or “22” is stored in the mode storage area.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, in the case of a high probability state (probability change mode, latent probability mode), in step S902, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable hold area is referred to, It is determined whether or not one of the first and second success / failure flags (see the success / failure determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a big win is won in the high-probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is set, in step S903, whether or not the first success / failure flag is turned on in consideration of the success / failure random number storage area. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a big win is won in the winning lottery in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, a jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is set on. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the fact that the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed in the random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot confirmation flag.

  In the subsequent step S905, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag (see the type determination process in FIGS. 15A and 15B) is set to ON, taking into account the execution area of the special variable suspension area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, that is, if “15RS”, a 15RS pattern setting process is performed in step S906. The 15RS pattern setting process is a process for executing fluctuation display for teaching the occurrence of “15RS”, and is based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Variation patterns of the display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 (variable display time, variation display stop mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42, variation display effect patterns of the decorative symbol display device 42, etc. ), And setting of a variation pattern command and a symbol command is performed based on the determination and various flags.

  The relationship between the numerical values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2, the variation pattern, and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like. That is, in the 15RS pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from normal reach, super reach, and premium reach, and the determined reach pattern and the time reduction state (probability change mode, time reduction mode, or first variation display On the basis of the determination result whether or not there are four holds), the variation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. Then, the information including 15RS, the determined reach pattern and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and the information for grasping the variation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. In addition, it is determined which one of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to 15RS is to be stopped, and is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, it is determined whether the stop symbol type is odd or even numbered, and the determined stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

  After step S906, the process proceeds to step S919 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S905, it is determined in step S907 whether or not the 2RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S907, that is, if “2RS”, a 2RS pattern setting process is performed in step S908, and then the process proceeds to step S919.

  In the 2RS pattern setting process, information including 2RS (chance variation) and the variation time of 2RS is set in the variation pattern command, and information capable of grasping the variation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. . Further, it is determined which one of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to 2RS is to be stopped, and stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, the stop symbol is determined as a chance symbol corresponding to 2RS, and the stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S907, a 15RN pattern setting process is performed in step S909, and then the process proceeds to step S919. In the 15RN pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from normal reach and super reach. On the basis of the determination result as to whether or not there is a certain state), the variation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. Then, information including 15 RN, the determined reach pattern and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and information capable of grasping the variation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, it is determined which one of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to 15RN is to be stopped, and is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, the type of stop symbol is determined to be an even number of lines and stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, if a big win is not won in a high probability state, the execution area of the special variable holding area is considered in step S911, and the small hit flag is set on. It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S911, that is, neither big win nor small win, in step S912, the execution area of the special variable holding area is considered, and the front and rear flags (see the reach determination process in FIG. 16) are on. It is determined whether or not there is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, that is, if “rearward / rearward reach”, the front / rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S919.

  In the front / rear reach pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from the normal reach and the super reach, and the determined reach pattern and the time shortening state (probability change mode, time reduction mode, or first variation display are suspended). The variation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined based on the determination result of whether or not there are four states. Then, the information including the front / rear reach, the determined reach pattern, and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and the information for grasping the variation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, it is determined which one of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to the disengagement is to be stopped, and stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, the stop symbol type is determined to be a back-and-forth symbol, and the determined stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

  Further, if a negative determination is made in step S912, in step S914, the execution area of the special variable holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the other than front and rear flags are on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S914, that is, “reach other than front / rear out”, a reach pattern setting process other than front / rear is performed in step S915, and then the process proceeds to step S919. In the reach pattern setting process other than before and after, the reach pattern is determined as normal reach, and the determined reach pattern and the time shortening state (probability change mode, time reduction mode, or the state where there are four hold of the first variation display) ) To determine the variation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42. Then, information including the reach other than forward / backward deviation, the determined reach pattern, and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and information capable of grasping the variation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, it is determined which one of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to the disengagement is to be stopped, and stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, the type of the stop symbol is determined as a symbol other than front and back deviation, and the determined stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

  In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S914, that is, if it is “completely out”, an outlier variation pattern setting process is performed in step S916, and then the process proceeds to step S919. In the deviation variation pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined as “no reach”, and the determined reach pattern and the time shortening state (probability variation mode, time shortening mode, or the first variation display is suspended). The variation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined based on the determination result of whether or not there are four states. Then, it is determined that the fluctuation is a complete deviation, the determined reach pattern (no reach is generated), and information including the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and information that can grasp the fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Remember. Further, it is determined which one of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to the disengagement is to be stopped, and stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, the stop symbol type is determined to be out of symbol, and the determined stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S911, that is, if it is determined that a small win is won, in step S917, a small hit confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the small hit state is fixed is set on. . Thereafter, in step S918, a small hit pattern setting process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S919. In the small hitting pattern setting process, information including the small hitting (chance fluctuation) and the information including the fluctuation time of the small hitting is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and information corresponding to the fluctuation time can be grasped. To remember. Further, it is determined which one of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to the small hits is to be stopped, and is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, the stop symbol is determined as the chance symbol corresponding to the small hit, and the stop symbol information is set in the symbol command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the low probability state, in step S910, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is considered, and the second success / failure is determined. It is determined whether or not the flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, the front / rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S919. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S910, the process proceeds to step S911.

  In step S919, a special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b is set on. Thereby, it is shown that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) is established in the special display devices 43a and 43b. In the subsequent step S920, a special figure display timer setting process for measuring the fluctuation time (the remaining time of fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. The special figure display timer is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

  In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b in the present embodiment. Based on the setting of the special figure display timer, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the next external output process of the normal process. In the special display devices 43a and 43b, switching display (variation display) is started. The sub-control device 262 that has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts variation display in the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command simultaneously with the start of variation of the special display devices 43a and 43b. Simultaneously with the stop display of 43a and 43b, the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by a combination of symbols based on the symbol command. After step S920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, a process for acquiring the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 and storing it in the special fluctuation hold area, a success / failure determination process in steps S506 and 513, and a variable display setting. In the processing, the winning / losing lottery is configured by the processing of Steps S901 to S903 and the like that determine the success / failure based on the success / failure flag and the small hit flag and the situation at that time. In addition, the second determination processing is configured by the processes in steps S901 to S903, and the variable display setting process is configured by the processes in steps S906, S908, S909, S913, S915, S916, and S918. The

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 804, that is, when the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S <b> 817, and a special figure display timer is subtracted. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 12 seconds (12000 msec), “3000” is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S818, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, an affirmative determination is made in step S818 when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S818, in step S823, a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step S823, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S818, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S819, and a stop display setting for performing a stop display in the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed in step S820. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the special display devices 43a and 43b, the mode corresponding to each jackpot type or loss set in the variable display setting process is stopped and displayed.

  Further, after step S820, in step S821, a stop command for causing the sub-control device 262 to perform stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is set. Thereby, the synchronization of the stop timings of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is ensured. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 based on the symbol command or the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is again obtained. There is no need to add. In addition, the display is mainly the stop display by the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary (for production).

  Subsequently, in step S822, the discrimination information setting process for performing the initial setting of the hit state and the switching setting of the game mode is performed, and then this process ends.

  Here, the discrimination information setting process in step S822 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1001, the execution area of the special variable suspension area is referred to and it is determined whether or not the jackpot confirmation flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the jackpot confirmation flag is turned off in step S1002, and the jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot state is in effect is turned on in step S1003. Further, in step S1004, it is determined whether or not the 2RS flag is set on by taking into account the execution area of the special variable suspension area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, that is, if it is a big hit of “15RS” or “15RN”, in step S1005, the number of rounds executed during the big win state (the number of opening of the variable winning device 32) is determined. “15” is set in the round number counter for discrimination.

  In the subsequent step S1006, “1” is set for the hit situation storage area. Further, in step S1007, for example, a value “2000” corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds is set for the special variable timer used for the control in the winning state (opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32). In step S1008, “8” indicating the maximum number of balls entered per round is set to “8” for the winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32. . The value of the winning counter is determined based on the detection information of the count switch 223 to determine whether or not there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32 during the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). When it is determined that there has been an incoming ball, 1 is subtracted.

  Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes hit type information and the like, and the sub-control device 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the win state. After step S1009, this process ends.

  It should be noted that the promotion effect of the appearance of the jackpot type in the jackpot state, etc. (for example, when the even-numbered slotted eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, it is taught that “15RS” was won in the jackpot state immediately after Or, when an odd number of double-eyed eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the fact that “15RS” has been won during the jackpot state immediately after that may be taught).

  If a positive determination is made in step S1004, “2” is set in the round number counter in step S1010. After step S1010, in step S1011, “1” is set for the winning situation storage area. In the subsequent step S1012, for the special variable timer, for example, a value “500” corresponding to an opening period of 2 seconds is set. In step S1013, a winning counter is set to “8”. In step S1014, the opening is performed. Set the command. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1015 whether or not the small hit determination flag is set to on by referring to the execution area of the special variable holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1015, the small hit determination flag is turned off in step S1016, and then the process proceeds to step S1010 described above. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a small win is made, the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed in the same manner as in the case where the winning of “2RS” is won.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1015, a value corresponding to the fluctuation interval (for example, 1 second) is set in the fluctuation interval timer in step S1017. In the decorative symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol variation display is basically stopped at the timing of the variable display stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, but the corresponding special display devices 43a and 43b are displayed. Until the variation interval after the variation display is completed, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed continue to swing small. When the fluctuation interval ends and the fluctuation display is stored on hold, the fluctuation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the fluctuation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 are started simultaneously. On the other hand, when the variable display is not held and stored even after the variable interval is over, the display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is ended, and the display mode in which the decorative symbol is completely stopped is derived. In addition, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of even-numbered stitches in the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, the combination of decorative symbols may be converted into an odd-numbered flat symbol in the variable interval period. There is a case where a re-lottery effect such as (a configuration that is necessarily converted) is performed.

  After step S1017, in step S1018, it is determined whether or not “12” is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the time reduction mode is set. If a negative determination is made in step S1018, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1018, in step S1019, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variation counter in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, at the end of the big hit state of “15RN”, the number of times of change display (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is set in the change number counter, and the special display Each time the variable display of the devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in step S1019.

  In a succeeding step S1020, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is “0”. When a negative determination is made in step S1020, that is, after the big hit state of “15RN” is ended, the change display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is performed. If it has not been performed yet, this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1020, in step S1021, “11” indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area. That is, when the variable display is performed a specified number of times in the special display devices 43a and 43b, the time reduction mode ends and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. After step S1021, in step S1022, a support end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode, and then this process ends.

  Next, the variable winning device control process for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the winning situation storage area is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the winning state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the winning state is not reached, this processing is terminated as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the hit state, “1” is set in the hit state storage area in the discrimination information setting process.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the winning state is in effect (when any one of “1” to “3” is set in the winning situation storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. Subtract 1 from the value of the special variable timer. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state, “2000” or “500” is set in the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

  In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not “1” is set in the winning status storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, “2” is set for the winning situation storage area in step S1205. In a succeeding step S1206, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. Here, it is determined whether or not it is “15RS” or “15RN” that is a big hit with a ball (whether it is other than “2RS” or “small hit”).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, in step S1207, a value “7500” corresponding to the time (30 seconds) during which the variable winning device 32 is kept open is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, in step S1208, a value “100” corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set for the special variable timer. To do.

  After step S1207 or step S1208, in step S1209, a process for opening the variable winning device 32 is performed. In step S1210, a round command is transmitted to inform the sub-control device 262 that the round is to be started. Set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1211 whether or not “3” is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the big hit state are completed and the ending period is started, “3” is set for the win situation storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter in step S1212.

  In a succeeding step S1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if there is still a round to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1214, and “1” is set for the hit situation storage area. Thereafter, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, a value “1000” corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set in the special variable timer in step S1216. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1215, a value “250” corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer in step S1217.

  After step S1216 or step S1217, “8” is set to the winning counter in step S1218. Further, in step S1219, a process for closing the variable winning device 32 is performed, and in step S1220, an interval command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that the interval is to be started. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if there remains a time (open time or close time) in which the variable winning device 32 is to be kept open or closed, the process proceeds to step S1221, and variable. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the winning device 32 is “0”. The winning counter is set to “8”, which is the upper limit (specified number) of winnings per round at the start of the big hit state and the start of the interval. Each time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32, 1 is subtracted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1221, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1221, that is, if an opportunity to end the round comes without waiting for the set period of the round to pass, the process proceeds to step S1212. As a result, if eight game balls have entered the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round will end immediately at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if all rounds in the big hit state are exhausted, the process moves to step S1222, and “3” is set for the win situation storage area. After step S1222, in step S1223, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1223, a value “2500” corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set in the special variable timer in step S1224. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1223, a value “250” corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer in step S1225.

  After step S1224 or step S1225, “7” is set to the winning counter in step S1226. Note that if the process of setting the ending after step S1222 is performed in the flow after the positive determination is made in step S1221, the value of the winning counter is “0”. If the value of the winning counter is set to “0” as it is at the start of the ending period, an affirmative determination is made in step S1221 in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, and the ending period cannot be completed. For this reason, a tentative numerical value other than “0” (“7” in this example) is entered in the winning counter in step S1226 to complete the ending period. Of course, the ending period may be completed by another method.

  After step S1226, in step S1227, a process for closing the variable winning device 32 is performed. In subsequent step S1228, an ending command is transmitted to inform the sub-control device 262 that ending is to be started. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, that is, when it is time to end the jackpot state after the ending period ends, the process proceeds to step S1229, and an end setting process is performed. In the end setting process, a mode storage area and a variation counter are set.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the 15RN flag is set to ON by referring to the execution area of the special variable suspension area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, a value “12” corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1402. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the end of the big hit state.

  In the subsequent step S1403, “100” is set to the variation counter. The variation counter is a display of variation for a specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode when “12” is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started. It is for grasping. After step S1403, in step S1404, a short time start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the time reduction mode (shift to the pullback stage) is set. Thereafter, after the big hit / medium flag is turned off in step S1411, the present process is terminated.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1405, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag is set on with reference to the execution area of the special variable suspension area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, “21” is set in the mode storage area in step S1406. As a result, the probability variation mode is given after the end of the big hit state. After step S1406, in step S1407, a probability change start command is set to notify the sub control device 262 of the start of the probability change mode (transition to the probability change stage). Thereafter, after the big hit / medium flag is turned off in step S1411, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1405, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the 2RS flag is set on with reference to the execution area of the special variable suspension area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1408, a value “22” corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1409. As a result, the latent mode is given after the end of the big hit state. After step S1409, in step S1410, a precursor stage start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the transition to the precursor stage is set. Thereafter, after the big hit / medium flag is turned off in step S1411, the present process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1408, that is, if a win is made in which the game mode is not changed, the process proceeds to step S1410 to set a precursor stage start command and a big win in step S1411. After the flag is turned off, this process is terminated. The precursor stage is a stage indicating that the player moves to either the normal mode or the latent mode when the winning of “2RS” is a big win or a small win.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after the end setting process in step S <b> 1229, in step S <b> 1230, “0” indicating that the hit state storage area is not in the big hit state is set. After that, in step S1231, a hit end command for informing the sub-control device 262 that the jackpot state is to be ended is set, and then this processing ends. The hit end command includes the number information of the variation counter set in the end setting process.

  Next, the normal display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal time interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the interval (normal time interval) set after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is “0”. To do. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is a normal interval, the value of the normal interval timer is subtracted in step S2102, and then this process ends. That is, for example, when the usual time interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec), “249 (“ 250 ”in the case where step S2102 is performed before step S2101”) is set in the usual time interval timer. In this process, the value of the usual interval timer is decremented by “1” every 4 msec and becomes “0” after 1 second.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is not the normal symbol interval period, in step S2103, the normal symbol display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display is displayed. Determine whether it is on. When the normal figure display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in a variable display.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, if no fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held, this processing is terminated as it is. For example, if a negative determination is made in step S2104, the normal symbol display device 41 performs standby display setting for deriving a display mode corresponding to the variable standby state in which the variable display is not performed. It is good. In other words, the normal symbol display device 41, after the suspension of fluctuation, will be maintained during the usual figure interval period (in the form showing the result of the entrance support lottery), but the usual figure interval period ends. Then, you may comprise so that it may switch to the display mode which shows that it is a fluctuation waiting state.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2105. In a succeeding step S2106, a process for shifting the data stored in the normal variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normally variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  After that, in step S2107, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is set and the normal figure fluctuation setting process for starting is executed.

  Here, the common map variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2301, the normal symbol display flag indicating that the normal symbol change display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to ON. In the subsequent step S2302, the winning situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not “0” is stored, that is, whether or not it is currently in a state other than the big hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, that is, if the jackpot state is not reached, whether or not a value of “12” or “21” is stored in the mode storage area in step S2303, that is, high It is determined whether or not it is a ball entering state (time reduction mode or probability variation mode).

  If the determination in step S2303 is affirmative, in step S2304, the normal symbol change display time is set to the normal symbol display timer for measuring the change time (remaining time) of the change display performed in the normal symbol display device 41. “100” is set to 0.4 seconds.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation holding area is “0”. It should be noted that in the high pitching state, the winning is made when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking the value in the range of “0 to 232” is “1 to 232”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if a winning support lottery for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is to be opened is won, the winning support lottery is won in step S2306. The entrance support flag indicating that is turned on. After step S2306, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, if the player is in a big hit state or a low pitched state, in step S2307, the normal symbol change display time is displayed with respect to the normal symbol display timer. Set “2000” to 8 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the normal variation holding area is “1 to 31”. In the low entry state, a win is awarded when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of “0 to 232” is “1 to 31”. Or, the normal symbol variation display time may be determined by lottery.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2308, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if the winning support lottery is won, in step S2306, after the incoming support flag indicating that the incoming support lottery has been won is set on, End the process. Note that the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol and the winning probability in the pitching support lottery can be set appropriately for each model of the pachinko machine, for example, the winning probability of the pitching support lottery in the high pitching state Further, the winning probability of the pitching support lottery in the low pitching state may be higher than the winning probability.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2107, in step S2108, the subtraction display process of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the fact that the variable display hold number of the normal symbol display device 41 has decreased by one. I do. In other words, if both the left and right normal hold lamps are blinking, the right normal hold lamp is lit while the left normal hold lamp is blinking, and the left normal hold lamp is blinking and the right normal hold lamp is blinking. When the normal hold lamp is lit, both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit. When both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left side normal hold lamp is lit and the right side normal hold lamp is lit. When the hold lamp is turned off and the left normal hold lamp is lit and the right normal hold lamp is turned off, processing is performed to turn off both the left and right normal hold lamps. After step S2108, this process ends.

  If the determination in step S2103 is affirmative, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process advances to step S2109 to perform processing for subtracting the general symbol display timer. Each time this processing is performed once, the count value of the general-purpose display timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, where it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal display timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2110, the normal symbol display flag is turned off in step S2111, and a normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2112. In other words, when the winning support lottery is won (when the incoming support flag is set on), both the left and right normal lamps of the normal symbol display device 41 are turned on. Turn on only the left-hand general lamp.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2113 to perform a common figure discrimination information setting process. Here, the common figure discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the entrance support flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is in an open state is set on.

  In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined whether or not any one of “12, 21” is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is a high pitching state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 1 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting winning device 33b. Set “450” to 8 seconds.

  Furthermore, in step S2405, “3” is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times with respect to the opening number counter for counting the number of times (the remaining number of times) the second starting winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, the pitch support flag is turned off in step S2408, and the flag during the support period is turned on in step S2409. Furthermore, in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in an open state, and then this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, if there is a low pitching state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. “100” is set. In step S2407, “1” is set to the opening number counter so that the second start winning device 33b is opened once. After step S2407, the pitch support flag is turned off in step S2408, the flag during the support period is turned on in step S2409, and the second start winning device 33b is set in the open state in step S2410. This process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2113, in step S2114, a value corresponding to a normal interval period (for example, 1 second) is set in the normal interval timer, and then the present process ends.

  If the determination in step S2110 is negative, in step S2115, a switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 (switching display for alternately turning on the pair of left and right general lamps). I do. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing in the normal processing. As a result, the normal display control processing timing, that is, switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms. After step S2115, this process ends.

  Next, the start winning device control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the support period flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal variable timer in step S2202.

  In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is a period during which the open / close state of the second start winning device 33b is maintained, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the normal variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the second start prize-winning device 33b is currently in an open state and the closing timing has arrived, the normal variable flag is turned off in step S2205. In subsequent step S2206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-opening counter, and in step S2207, setting is made to close the second start winning device 33b.

  Thereafter, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-releases counter is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the flag during the support period is turned off in step S2209, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning entry support lottery is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, the second start winning device 33b is released three times based on it. If there is a remaining number of times, a value corresponding to the interval time (for example, “250”) is set for the normal variable timer in step S2210, and then this process is terminated.

  Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, in the interval period during which the second start winning device 33b is opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in a closed state), the timing for ending the interval period In step S2211, the normal variable flag is turned on, and in step S2212, the value corresponding to the open time for the normal variable timer (in this example, when the high pitching state; “450”, low pitching) In the state; “100”) is set, and in step S2213, the second start winning device 33b is set to the open state. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  When the second start winning device 33b is in an open state, if a specified number (for example, one) of game balls have entered the second start winning device 33b, the second start winning device 33b. May be configured to be immediately closed (for example, if a negative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the second start winning switch 224b is detected, and an affirmative determination is made). In such a case, it may be configured to proceed to step S2205).

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed.

  When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3001 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and ends this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received. If a command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control apparatus 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S3103, the RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If no power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and a payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Thereafter, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  Note that since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is OFF, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of step S3304 to step S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command. In step S3306, it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. If the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission for the winning ball is set.

  As described above, the main controller 261 performs initialization processing of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes processing of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the processing in step S3307 prohibits initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. The payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not made when a prize ball remains. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cut-off. In order to permit the payout of the prize ball, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . In addition, when a winning ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the winning ball can be paid out early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), is not a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process ends, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the CR unit is received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is transmitted to the firing control circuit 312 of the power / fire control device 310 in step S3203.

  After step S3203 or when a negative determination is made in step S3202, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3205, and the state return operation is executed if it is determined that the state return operation has started. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, when the payout motor is clogged, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3206, setting of the lower pan full state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed in accordance with the change in the state of the lower pan 15. That is, the full state of the lower pan 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the full detection switch, and when the lower pan is full, the lower pan full state is set. Execute the setting of dish full tank release state. Further, in step S3207, the setting of the tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or the tank ball absence release state (ball presence state) is executed in accordance with the change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is detected based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and the special setting for the absence of the tank ball and the setting for the no tank ball state are executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S3208, for example, the presence / absence of a state to be notified, such as an error state, is determined. If there is a state to be notified, the state is notified.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3209, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3210, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3211.

  In step S3212, the state return switch 321 is checked to execute the ball removal process by driving the payout motor on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In the subsequent step S3213, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In a succeeding step S3903, a hold information storage process is performed in which information on the advance command output from the main control device 261 is stored in a hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. As described above, the starting command corresponds to information indicating which of the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b is a variable display triggered by the winning, a big hit or a small hit. Information indicating whether the information is fluctuation information, information indicating the type of jackpot, information indicating the type of reach, and the like are included.

  The hold information storage area of the sub-control device 262 is similar to the special variable hold area of the main control device 261. The first hold information storage area and the second hold information area each having four hold areas (holding first to fourth holding areas). A holding information storage area and one execution area are provided. In the first hold information storage area, information on whether or not a big hit, a jackpot type, a small hit is made according to the reception history of the starting command based on the first fluctuation display (information stored in the first special fluctuation hold area). Information on whether or not and information on fluctuation display such as reach patterns (variation information) are stored in time series. In the second hold information storage area, the change information is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the preceding command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the variation information related to the first variation display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b. Four pieces of fluctuation information regarding each can be stored on hold. As a result, the sub-control device 262 can grasp not only the execution areas of the first and second special change reservation areas of the main control device 261 but also the change information stored in the reservation area. .

  Here, the hold information storage processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S 4101, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, whether or not the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area) in step S4102. Determine whether or not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the first start winning device 33a (variation information stored in the first special variation holding area), in step S4103 The first fluctuation hold counter Nd that counts the number of fluctuation information held in the first hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S4104, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on whether or not the jackpot, reach pattern information, etc. are stored in the vacant holding area of the first holding information storage area. Store in the first area.

  In subsequent step S4105, notice information storage processing is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, there may be intentional derivations of effects related to each other in a plurality of continuous variable displays (so-called “continuous notice” is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether to perform continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information. Among the areas, the change information is stored in the newly stored reservation area in step S4104.

  The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 49, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 49) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The continuous notice counter is periodically updated, and the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer) each time.

  The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 9) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The notice type counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

  In the advance notice storage process, when the variation information is stored in the hold information storage area, the values of the continuous advance notice counter and the advance notice type counter stored in the continuous advance notice counter buffer and the advance notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each of the holding area and the execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notice is derived.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success / failure determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to carry out continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when determining the mode of continuous notice. A plurality of advance notice determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice determination table and the advance notice table to be considered are selected according to the variation information.

  After step S4105, in step S4106, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106, it is confirmed whether or not there is a holding area in which the continuous notice flag is already set on. Therefore, when there is no confirmation of the presence of the holding area for which the continuous notice flag is set, and further, only the variation information corresponding to the complete detachment (the detachment where the reach state does not occur) is stored in the first holding area. , Lottery for continuous notice is to be performed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that there is a holding area in which the continuous notice flag is set, the lottery for the continuous notice is not performed.

  In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106, when the value of the first variable hold counter Nd is “2” or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area, Determine whether or not to execute consecutive notices by referring to the notice determination table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (the one corresponding to the jackpot is easier to win than the one corresponding to a miss) . Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach pattern, or the game mode based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area. To determine whether to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag is turned on for all the holding areas in which the variation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag in the execution area is not turned on.

  More specifically, the continuous notice flag is a first change display among a series of change displays in which a continuous notice effect is performed, and a first C flag indicating that the continuous notice effect continues, and a series of change displays. The second F flag indicating that the continuous notice effect ends (the reach state occurs) and the second variable display of the series of change indications, and the continuous notice effect. 2C flag indicating that the continuation is continued, the third variation display in the series of variation displays, the third F flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is terminated, and the third variation in the series of variation displays There is a 3C flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is continued, and a fourth F flag indicating the fourth change display in the series of change indications and indicating that the continuous notice effect ends. Then, based on the value of the first variable hold counter Nd, information on whether or not it is newly stored in the first hold information storage area, a continuous notice flag is set for each first hold area. For example, when the variation information is retained and stored in the third storage area of the first suspension information storage area and the derivation of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the suspension storage of the variation information, the first suspension is performed. The third F flag is set in the third information storage area, the second C flag is set in the second, and the first C flag is set in the first.

  After step S4106, in step S4107, a hold icon setting process for additionally displaying one hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 40A, a hold icon 461 simulating a “floating ring” is displayed in a hold display area 462 provided at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 42. The hold display area 462 of the present embodiment includes an execution correspondence area 462a corresponding to the execution area of the hold information storage area, and a hold correspondence area corresponding to the hold areas of the hold information storage areas (first and second hold information storage areas). 462b, and up to nine hold icons 461 can be displayed. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the first fluctuation display and the hold icon 461 corresponding to the second fluctuation display are in a common mode. It is impossible to identify whether the hold icon 461 corresponds to the fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display.

  In addition, the hold icon 461 may be derived in a manner that suggests the jackpot expectation degree of the corresponding variable display. Hereinafter, such a hold icon 461 is also referred to as a “prefetch hold icon 463”. The prefetch hold icon 463 of the present embodiment is derived in a mode (see FIGS. 40B and 40C) in which the character uses a “floating ring”. Furthermore, a plurality of types of pre-read hold icons 463 are prepared, and the pattern of the pre-read hold icon 463 is associated with a winning expectation level (a jackpot expectation level) for occurrence of a big hit state. As a result, the prefetch hold icon 463 is ranked with respect to the jackpot expectation degree according to the mode, and the prefetch hold icon 463 is derived to suggest the jackpot expectation degree (prefetch hold notice effect is performed). It is configured.

  Further, when the prefetch hold icon 463 is derived, the pattern of the prefetch hold icon 463 changes until the change display corresponding to the prefetch hold icon 463 is consumed (hold change effect is derived). There is a case.

  That is, in the hold icon setting process in step S4107, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the prefetch hold icon 463 is to be derived. In the case of no win, the pattern of the hold icon 461 is determined to be the default (only the float). Is done. On the other hand, in the case of winning, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a holding change effect is performed. In the case of winning, the holding change flag of the corresponding holding area is set on, and the pattern of the prefetch hold icon 463 is set as follows. An upper limit pattern that may be finally displayed and a temporary pattern that is a lower rank expectation degree (lower rank) than the upper limit pattern and that is displayed first are determined. It should be noted that the temporary pattern may be configured such that there is an option that only the default hold icon 461 is displayed at first. On the other hand, in the case of no win, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the prefetch hold icon 463.

  Basically, a process is performed in which the hold icon 461 having the determined pattern is displayed so that the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is arranged on the right side of the rightmost icon. Is called. In the present embodiment, since the second variation display is digested with priority over the first variation display, the second variation display is newly suspended in a state where the first variation display is suspended. In the hold correspondence area 462b, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the second hold display that is newly held is displayed at the left position of the leftmost hold icon 461 among the hold icons 461 corresponding to the first change display. It has become so.

  In the present embodiment, when the prefetch hold icon 463 is derived in the hold display area 462 in step S4107, the prefetch hold producing flag is set on. After step S4107, this process ends.

  Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, that is, when the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area). Then, the process proceeds to step S4108, and the second fluctuation hold counter Ne that counts the number of pieces of change information held in the second hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, in step S4109, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on whether or not the jackpot, reach pattern information, etc. are reserved in the second reserved information storage area. Store in the first area. In subsequent step S4110, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter values are stored in the reserved area in which the variation information is newly stored in step S4109 in the second reserved information storage area.

  After step S4110, in step S4111, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4111, it is confirmed whether or not there is a holding area in which the continuous notice flag is already set on. Therefore, when the presence is confirmed, the lottery of the continuous notice is not performed, and it is determined whether or not the reserved area where the continuous notice flag is turned on is the first reserved area. When it is determined that the area is the first reserved area, the continuous notice flag of the first reserved area is turned off, and the second F flag is set in the second reserved area in which the variation information is newly stored. In other words, when the second variation display is suspended while the continuous announcement is being performed with respect to the first variation display, the continuous announcement effect of the first variation display is interrupted by the second variation display. In the second variation display, a display mode for ending the continuous notice effect is derived.

  On the other hand, in the case where the presence of the holding area for which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, only the variation information corresponding to the complete detachment (the detachment in which the reach state does not occur) is stored in the second holding area. If there is a lottery for continuous notice. The continuous notice lottery process in step S4111 only corresponds to the ball entering the second start winning device 33b in the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  After step S4111, a hold icon setting process is performed in step S4112, and then this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3913.

  In step S3905, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the out-of-place design symbols CO, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO determines a symbol when the fluctuation symbol of the decoration symbol display device 42 stops when the jackpot state occurs (in this embodiment, as a jackpot decoration symbol counter CO). 9 (0 to 8) counter values are prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 8, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8), returns to 0.

  When a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is to be stopped is received from the main control device 261, for example, the counter value is 0 based on a table (a table for associating the counter value and the decorative symbol). If so, the combination of jackpot symbols is determined in such a way that “1” (the doublet) is 1 and “2” (the doublet) is. The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as will be described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decoration symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer, and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the symbol command is received. It may be.

  Also, when a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is to be stopped is received, for example, if the counter value is 0, 1, it is “2”. The combination of jackpot symbols is determined in such a manner that “6” (the double-eyed) is 5 or 6 and “8” (the double-faced) is 7 or 8.

  The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of the stopped symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning or failing lottery is lost. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the column, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. A stop symbol in the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper symbol counter CL, a stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle symbol counter CM, and a stop symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower symbol counter CR.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. . Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the reach / reverse symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front / rear out, and the complete Stored in one of the off symbol buffers.

  Here, the update process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be sequentially updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the update time of the medium symbol counter CM (step S4002 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the medium symbol counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted, The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the above-described CL, CM, and CR update processing, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in a single update process, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is no. Thereby, every time the update process is executed three times, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is determined that the combination is a reach symbol (YES in S4006), then in step S4007, it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas are the same as the symbols in the middle symbol display area). Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, this combination is terminated without storing the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of symbols that are out of front and rear. If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of symbols that are out of front / rear (front / rear out of reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009 and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is The stored data is stored in the outreach symbol buffer and the process is terminated. If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment (reach other than front / rear detachment) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is combined. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the back and forth detachment of the RAM 553, and the process is terminated.

  Further, if the combination is other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the combination of the off symbol (completely off symbol). The combination of the out-of-clock symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the complete out-of- symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a hold process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received (whether or not the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the variation information of the second variation display is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the first variation suspension counter Nd is decremented by one.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and when the second variation display is stored on hold, the first variation display is digested. Never happen. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is suspended and stored in the second suspension information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. For this reason, in this embodiment, in step S4202, it is determined whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”, so that the fluctuation pattern command is displayed in the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. Which variation information is possessed is discriminated. Of course, the variation pattern command is provided with information indicating which variation information of the first variation display or the second variation display is supported, and based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command is displayed in the first variation display and It may be determined which variation information of the second variation display is included.

  After step S4203, in step S4204, a process for shifting data stored in the first hold information storage area is executed. The data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the first hold information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted, such as execution area, second hold area, first hold area, third hold area, second hold area, fourth hold area, third hold area. After step S4204, the process proceeds to step S4207.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if even one piece of change information of the second change display is held, the value of the second change hold counter Ne is decremented by 1 in step S4205.

  In a succeeding step S4206, a process for shifting the data stored in the second reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the second hold information storage area to the execution area side. The hold first area → the execution area, the hold second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207. In the present embodiment, there is one execution area for the hold information storage area, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area is displayed with a variable display corresponding to the data. Will be shifted to a common execution area.

  In step S4207, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the advance notice setting process in step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice flag (see the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4106) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is on. Since this is not performed, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made, based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, what is the type if it is a big hit, and what is the reach pattern if it is not a big hit, etc. The type of continuous notice is determined with reference to the corresponding table. The type of continuous notice determined here is derived at a predetermined timing when the corresponding change display is performed.

  After step S4207, in step S4208, a hold icon shift process for shifting the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. Note that a hold icon storage area for storing the type of the hold icon 461 is provided in each hold area and execution area of the hold information storage area, and the information related to the hold icon 461 is also stored in the hold information storage described above. The data is shifted by area data shift processing.

  The hold icon shift process is a process for redrawing the hold icon 461 in accordance with the data shift. In the decorative symbol display device 42, every time the variable display is digested (executed), The hold icon 461 located on the left side is deleted, and the hold icon 461 arranged on the right side thereof is shifted to the left by one (the display location moves). After step S4208, this process ends.

  In this embodiment, prior to the process of redrawing the hold icon 461 in step S4208, if there is a hold area in which the hold change flag is set on, the hold change effect of the prefetch hold icon 463 is displayed. A lottery of whether or not to perform is performed, and when winning, the pattern of the prefetch hold icon 463 is changed to a higher rank pattern (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern is not exceeded). In addition, when it is determined that there is no holding area in which the holding change flag is set to ON, the pre-reading holding effect flag is turned off. Further, by changing the pattern of the prefetch hold icon 463, when the prefetch hold icon 463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the prefetch hold in-progress flag is turned off and the hold change flag is turned off. ing.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, display setting processing is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are received, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, the variation time, the stop symbol, etc., and displays the variation pattern display pattern of the decorative symbol. decide. Then, control is performed such as outputting the determined items to the display control device 45 as display commands.

  The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device. Note that once the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is coordinated with the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses. Will continue to be displayed.

  Further, when starting the variable display, if the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106) is on, each situation is determined based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. Referring to the table corresponding to, the type of the continuous notice to be derived for the variable display is determined, the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice is determined, or the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. Or Furthermore, in the display setting process in step S3907, a process for performing effect control during the big hit (a win display process) is also performed.

  Here, the variable display setting process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received. For example, the flag corresponding to the case where the processing corresponding to the reception of the variation pattern command is performed in the hold processing (see FIG. 36) is turned on, and the variation display is set in the display setting processing. It may be configured such that the flag is turned off, and it is possible to determine whether or not a variation pattern command has been received by checking the flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4501, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, the variation pattern is determined in step S4502 based on the reach pattern included in the variation pattern command and the variation time. The variation pattern of this embodiment includes, for example, a normal short reach of 12 seconds, a normal long reach of 15 seconds, a first super reach of 25 seconds, and a second super reach in a low entry state. , 30 seconds of 3rd super reach, 60 seconds of premium reach, 18 seconds of chance fluctuation, and 10 seconds of complete deviation fluctuation.

  Next, in step S4503, an effect pattern corresponding to each variation pattern is determined. In other words, each variation pattern has not a single pattern but a plurality of patterns. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display on the ornamental symbol display device 42 as the effect display means is performed from the start to the end of the variation display (expanded over time) and the main effect. It is performed in an interrupted manner, or is performed (displayed) in parallel with the main effect at one time of the main effect, and the derivation of the specific effect in the main effect is postponed for a time corresponding to the period performed in parallel (predetermined) (Sub-directed), which is derived once in a certain period of time). The main effect is divided into four scenes, and the result of the lottery determination is taught or suggested in the last scene.

  More specifically, the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed in the lower symbol display region in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed secondly among the three symbol display regions in the decorative symbol display device 42 ( Hereinafter, “scene 1” until simply called “second stop”) and “timing to develop from“ second stop ”to“ super reach production ”(hereinafter simply referred to as“ super development ”). “Scene 2”, “Scene 3” from “Super Development” to “Fixed Effect”, and “End of Fluctuation Display” until the end of the variable display (the third stop where all decorative symbols are stopped) It is divided into “last scene”. The “super reach production” in the present embodiment is a dedicated animation production (see FIG. 41 (g), FIG. 42 (m), etc.).

  In addition, the “decision effect” is a continuation of the animation of the super reach effect. Compared to the super reach effect, the moving speed of the decorative symbol (final stop decorative symbol) in the middle symbol display area that is stopped last is slower. In addition, the final stop decorative symbol is emphasized such that the size of the final stop decorative symbol is enlarged (the sound and electrical decoration modes also change), and finally the final stop decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. This is an effect (see FIG. 41 (h)) in which the result of the lottery is taught or suggested. Also, instead of emphasizing the final stop decorative pattern, an animation (for example, the final action of the character's predetermined challenge) showing the result of the lottery is emphasized (for example, a slow motion or a still image, There is also a pattern (see FIG. 42 (o)) in which the face or the part where the result of the challenge is known is closed up (enlarged or deformed). In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special display devices 42a and 43b in the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to the “effect display”, and the “settlement effect” is the “impression effect”, Corresponds to “last impression production”.

  There are other variation patterns of decorative symbol display, but as the final effect, the same movie is repeatedly derived, the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined movie is thrown. It is configured as a mode derived by motion. Further, as will be described in detail later, the conclusion effect indicating that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high is configured such that the derivation time is easily set longer.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the effect pattern of “Scene 1” includes a default pattern set as a normal display (basically, a decorative design is scrolled only on the front side of the background screen). A reach chance up pattern (for example, a specific character is displayed) that increases the degree of expectation that a reach state will occur, a continuous notice pattern in which a continuous notice effect is performed, and a step up pattern in which a step up effect is performed Exists.

  The effect pattern of “Scene 2” includes a pattern without reach (see FIG. 41 (c)) in which no reach state occurs, and a pattern without reach without a notice effect in which a reach state has occurred but the jackpot expectation is increased. A weak notice pattern in which a normal notice effect (an effect display in which “bubble” rises as shown in FIG. 41E, hereinafter also referred to as “weak notice”) is derived immediately after the reach state occurs; Immediately after the reach state has occurred, a strong advance notice pattern (an effect display such as “fish school” crossing as shown in FIG. 41 (f), hereinafter also referred to as “strong advance notice”) is derived. And exist.

  The effect pattern of “Scene 3” includes a normal variation pattern in which a super reach effect does not occur (regardless of the presence or absence of a reach state), a pattern from which a super reach effect A or B is derived, and a super reach effect A or B. On the other hand, there are a pattern in which a chance up effect is combined and a pattern in which a super reach effect C (which always has a chance up effect) is derived.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, a sub-effect may be derived in “scene 3”. The sub effects of the present embodiment include “cut-in effects” and “button effects”. The cut-in effect is an effect display in which a still image is derived for a predetermined time on the full display screen of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the main effect (decorative symbol or the like) is not temporarily displayed. Furthermore, the cut-in effect of the present embodiment is intended to be derived by temporarily interrupting the progress of the main effect, and is displayed together with the main effect and does not affect the progress of the main effect (displayed simultaneously) The main effect is not included).

  The button effect is composed of a reception display period for deriving a reception display that teaches that the operation is in an enabled state for receiving the operation of the effect button 125, and a result display period for displaying the result of the button effect. As shown in FIG. 42 (k) and the like, during the reception display period of the button effects, the button effects are displayed on the front side of the main effects so that they are displayed together with the main effects. . However, the main effect does not proceed, and the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed (the decorative symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas) continue to be stopped and displayed as they are (the decoration in the middle symbol display area). The symbol) continues to be displayed in a variable manner (the measurement of the main effect time is interrupted and the display state of the main effect is maintained). In the result display period, a corresponding moving image or still image is displayed on the entire display unit of the decorative symbol display device 42. In this embodiment, the operation effective period in the operation effective state matches the reception display period, but the start of the effective time may be slightly delayed. In this embodiment, the button effect (particularly the reception display period) corresponds to the operation effect.

  The “last scene” production pattern is derived by combining a pattern in which the normal fluctuation and super reach production are inherited as they are, and a first chance up production for the continuation of the super reach production. And a pattern derived by combining the second chance up effect with respect to the continuation of the super reach effect. At the end of the last scene, a “result teaching effect” for teaching the result of variation display is derived.

  The result teaching effect is the last effect of the main effect, and is an effect that teaches or suggests the result of the lottery in the main effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (h), in the variable display (main effect) mainly composed of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are almost stopped in all the upper, middle, and lower decorative symbol display areas (slight amount swinging, etc.). In this case, the decorative pattern is almost stopped in all the decorative symbol display areas (the combination of decorative symbols is displayed). This is a result teaching effect. In this case, the result teaching effect time is only (substantially) the same timing as the end timing of the decorative symbol variation display. Incidentally, in the period of the variation interval after the variation display, the decorative pattern stop mode is maintained, and if there is a variation display that is suspended after the variation interval ends, the variation display is started.

  When a settlement effect is performed, the result teaching effect period is from the end of the settlement effect until the end of the variable display. For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (o) or the like, in a variable display (main effect) mainly composed of an animation of a character or the like, the result of the lottery is taught or suggested by the end of the animation. In this embodiment, a decorative pattern is also displayed along with the animation, but the end of the animation (for example, the display where the left frog has the beach flag) is derived first, and then the afterglow animation (for example, After the left frog is happy), the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area is stopped and displayed (for example, the decorative symbol is largely stopped in front of the animation such as the frog). Yes. In this case, the result teaching effect time is from the end of the animation (end of the finalization effect) to the stop display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area (end of the decorative symbol variation display). Note that the last scenes of FIGS. 47 and 48 correspond to a change display (main effect) mainly composed of animation of a character or the like.

  In addition, the above “settlement effect” is an effect for further enlarging what the result of the decorative symbol change display will be immediately before the “result teaching effect”, and even if the settlement effect is not derived, A video that leads to the result teaching effect is derived (for example, the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area continuously changes from the scene 3 and is gradually displayed at the timing of the result teaching effect while gradually reducing the speed). . When the final effect is derived in the last scene, the last scene is configured by the final effect and the result teaching effect. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes an effect display means, and the variable display of the decorative symbols performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to the effect display. Further, the effect display of each scene corresponds to the scene-specific effect display.

  In step S4503, various scenes and various random number counters are used to determine the effect pattern of each scene based on the change information from the main control device 261 and the setting of the continuous notice flag. Also, as shown in FIG. 43, the effect pattern of each scene is associated with the jackpot expectation degree, and when selecting the variation display effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot, It is easier to select an effect pattern with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than selecting an effect pattern. The selectable effect patterns are limited by the reach pattern. For example, when the C flag is set in the variable display corresponding to complete losing or the continuous notice flag, the effect pattern selected in each scene is One by one.

  In the present embodiment, in step S4503, it is also determined whether or not a sub-effect is to be derived (determined by lottery in the case of the super reach effect A or B, and derived in the case of the super reach effect C). And the type of the sub-effect is determined. In the present embodiment, when a button effect is derived, a settlement effect is always derived. In addition, when the derivation of the cut-in effect is determined, the cut-in effect flag and the sub effect standby flag are set on, and when the derivation of the button effect is determined, the button effect flag and The sub effect standby flag is set on. Since a plurality of cut-in effects and button effects are set, a plurality of types of cut-in effect flags and button effect flags are provided so that it can be specified which type.

  After step S4503, in step S4504, the total jackpot expectation (total expectation) of scene 1, scene 2, and scene 3 is discriminated with reference to a combination expectation discriminating table as shown in FIG.

  After step S4504, in step S4505, processing for determining the length of time of the last scene is performed based on the total expectation of scenes 1, 2 and 3 and the jackpot expectation of the last scene. First, referring to the last scene time discrimination table shown in FIG. 45, when the total expectation is “low” and the big hit expectation of the last scene is “low”, the last scene time is determined by the first lottery. Decide what to do.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (d), the last scene time lottery table used for the first lottery is prepared for big hits, off and small hits. The type relating to the length of the last scene time is determined based on the value of the last scene time lottery random number counter (0 to 50 loop counter) acquired when setting the scene time. For example, in the first lottery at the time of winning, the “last pattern” with the normal length of the last scene and the last stop decoration symbol after the last scene is entered after the last scene is entered. There is a “long pattern” in which the time during which the stop decorative symbol is moved and displayed (final effect) is long (the time shown in FIG. 41 (h) and FIG. 42 (o) is long).

  In addition, when super reach effects A to C accompanied by a chance up (sub effect) are derived and a variable display with a variable time of 30 seconds is performed, the variable display proceeds in the same flow as the short pattern of 25 seconds reach. However, the change display progresses in the same flow as the “special 1 pattern” with the long last scene (decision effect) and the short pattern with 25 seconds reach (the scene is updated at the same timing), and the final effect and result The teaching effect was derived in the same flow as the short pattern of 25-second reach. Actually, the final effect and the result teaching effect are a pseudo final effect and a result teaching effect (a pseudo final effect and a pseudo result). Teaching effect), and the scene is still scene 3, and after the pseudo result teaching effect (once it becomes a pseudo stop mode as shown in FIG. 42 (i)) As shown in 42 (j), a “special 2 pattern (restart), in which the final stop symbol (medium decoration symbol) and the character appear to move), a real pseudo-decision effect, and a result teaching effect are derived. Pattern) ”.

  Regarding the last scene, the difference between the case where the short pattern is selected and the case where the long pattern is selected is that only the moving speed of the final stop symbol and the operation speed of the animation indicating the result of the lottery determination are different (FIG. 41). (H), see FIG. 42 (o)). Basically, another display mode is not added or even a part of the display mode is not changed. It is a production pattern). Also, the “special pattern” is an effect dedicated to big hits, and is not selected when it is out of play or small hits. Furthermore, in the case of a big hit, the ratio of selecting a long pattern is set higher than in the case of a miss or a small hit. As a result, even if the expected degree of jackpot for each scene is relatively low, the expected degree of jackpot when the long pattern is selected in the last scene is increased.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 45, when the total expectation of scenes 1 to 3 / the jackpot expectation of the last scene is “medium / low”, “low / medium”, and “medium / medium” In the second lottery, it is determined to determine the time of the last scene. As shown in FIG. 46E, the selection ratio of the “short pattern” is lower in the second lottery at the time of off / small hit than the first lottery at the time of off / small hit. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46B, the selection ratio of the “short pattern” is higher in the second lottery for the big hit than in the first lottery for the big win. That is, when the second lottery is performed, since the big hit expectation degree in each scene is relatively high as compared with the case where the first lottery is performed, the long pattern is selected in the last scene where the miss is taught. This is a development that is convincing (relatively natural and acceptable) from the flow up to that point, and even if a short pattern is selected in the last scene where the jackpot is taught, the expectation of jackpot expectation of a certain degree of variation display Can be secured.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45, when the big expectation degree of the total expectation / last scene is “medium / high”, it is decided to determine the time of the last scene in the third lottery. As shown in FIG. 46 (f), in the third lottery at the time of miss / small hit, the selection ratio of “short pattern” is lower than that at the second lottery at the time of miss / small hit. In addition, as shown in FIG. 46C, in the third lottery at the time of the big hit, the selection ratio of the “short pattern” is higher than that in the first lottery at the time of the big win, and the “short pattern” is higher than the second lottery at the time of the big win. The selection ratio of “special pattern” is higher than that of the second lottery at the time of big hit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45, in this embodiment, when the total expectation is “high”, the last scene is displayed regardless of whether the big hit expectation of the last scene is “low / medium / high”. It will be set to “Long Pattern”. In addition, the last scene is set to “short pattern” when the big expectation degree of the total expectation / last scene is “low / high”.

  After step S4505, in step S4506, processing for determining and storing each time of scene 1 to scene 3 is performed. As shown in FIG. 47, in the present embodiment, setting the last scene time longer does not increase (extend) the variation time of the entire decorative symbol variation display, but determines it by the main controller 261. The time of the previous scene is set to be shorter by the length of the last scene in the changed time frame. In particular, in this embodiment, when the time of the last scene is set to be long (in the case of a long pattern), the cut-in effect as the sub effect and the button effect are configured to be shortened by the same time. Yes. That is, the lengths of the scenes 1, 2, and 3 that are the main effects are not changed. However, since the sub effect is performed in the middle of the scene 3, the time from the start to the end of the scene 3 is shortened by the amount of time the sub effect is shortened.

  For example, when the last scene is a short pattern with a normal length, a 30 second variable display in which a super reach effect is generated is a button in which scene 1 is 6 seconds, scene 2 is 2 seconds, and scene 3 is a sub-effect. 17 seconds including the production (8 seconds for the button production, 9 seconds for the scene 3) and 5 seconds for the last scene (2 seconds for the final production). On the other hand, if the last scene has a longer pattern than usual, the scene 1 is 6 seconds (same) and the scene 2 is 2 seconds (same), even if the last super-reaching effect is 30 seconds. , Scene 3 is 14 seconds including sub-effects (Scene 3 itself is the same in 9 seconds, Button effect is 3 seconds shorter and 5 seconds), Last scene is 8 seconds (Fixed effect is 3 seconds longer and 5 seconds) Yes.

  It should be noted that the scene 1 hour storage area for storing the scene 1 time, the scene 2 hour storage area for storing the scene 2 time, the scene 3 hour storage area for storing the scene 3 time, and the final effect time among the last scenes. A settlement effect time storage area for storing, a result teaching time storage area for storing the result teaching effect time of the last scene, and a sub effect time storage area for storing the time of the sub effect are provided, and for each storage area, step S4505 and A value corresponding to the time determined in step S4506 is set.

  In the present embodiment, in the step S4506, for the sub-effect timer used when performing the control related to the sub-effect, the time from the start of the decorative symbol variation display to the start of the sub-effect is started. Set the corresponding value. Further, a value corresponding to the time of the sub effect determined in step S4506 is stored in the sub effect time storage area for storing the length of the sub effect time. In the present embodiment, when the button effect information is stored in the sub effect time storage area, the time length of the reception display period and the time length of the result display period are stored. Yes. In the present embodiment, the combination expectation determination table, the last scene time determination table, and the last scene time lottery table (particularly the last scene time lottery table) that are used when determining the time of the final effect are impression effects. Apart from these, an impression effect pattern setting table used for setting a final effect pattern is provided.

  After step S4506, in step S4507, “1” indicating the scene 1 is set to the scene counter used for grasping the scene of the decorative symbol variation display. After step S4507, in step S4508, a value corresponding to the time of scene 1 is set in the scene grasp timer used for grasping the scene. After step S4508, this process ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41A and the like, the result of the variation display of the decorative symbols is taught / indicated in the right part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 42 as the impression time display means. The impression time display 471 that teaches the remaining period until and the jackpot expectation degree (winning expectation degree) of the variation display is derived. Furthermore, the impression time display 471 of the present embodiment is displayed from the beginning of the settlement effect, in particular, in this example, from the start of the variable display, and depending on the mode, the duration of the settlement effect may be suggested. It has become.

  More specifically, the impression time display 471 has a bar flag shape, the parameter display 472 indicating how much the remaining period (length of time) of the variable display is, and the parameter display 472 is “0”. It has an end line 473 that is an indicator that the information to be notified by the variable display has been completed (the conclusion effect has ended), and a reference line 474 that indicates the amount of the parameter display 472 at the time when the variable display is started. . In the present embodiment, the parameter display 472 is set to “0” when the (real) final effect is finished and the (real) result teaching effect is derived.

  Next, the relationship between the progress of the variable display and the impression time display 471 will be described. First, when the decorative symbol variation display is started, a parameter display 472 extending from the end line 473 to the reference line 474 is derived as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 41B and 41C, the parameter display 472 gradually decreases (approaches the end line 473) as the variable display progresses. Finally, as shown in FIG. 41 (d), the parameter display 472 becomes “0” (only overlaps with the end line 473) when the settlement effect is finished.

  For example, when the “weak notice” of the notice effect is derived in the scene 2, the parameter display 472 increases to the state of FIG. 41E at the timing when the “weak notice” is derived. Further, when the “strong notice” of the notice effect is derived in the scene 2, the parameter display 472 increases more greatly to the state of FIG. 41 (f) at the timing when the “strong notice” is derived.

  That is, in this embodiment, in any of the scene 1 to the last scene, when the expected degree of jackpot of the scene is “low”, a display mode in which the parameter display 472 continues to decrease is derived, and the expected degree of jackpot of the scene is derived. Is “medium”, the parameter display 472 basically continues to decrease, but a display mode in which the parameter display 472 increases at a predetermined timing is derived, and when the scene jackpot expectation is “high”, Basically, although the parameter display 472 continues to decrease, a display mode in which the parameter display 472 increases at a predetermined timing as compared with the case where the parameter display 472 is “medium” is derived.

  Note that when a chance up effect (such as a mini character effect) for reaching occurrence is derived in the scene 1, the parameter display 472 increases at the start timing of the chance up effect. When the continuous notice effect corresponding to the “F flag” is derived in the scene 1, the parameter display 472 increases at the start timing (or the end timing is acceptable) of the continuous notice effect. When a step-up effect is derived in scene 1, the parameter display 472 increases each time a predetermined step-up is performed. When the super reach effect is derived in the scene 3, the parameter display 472 increases at the timing when the super reach effect is derived. When the chance up effect is derived in the last scene, the parameter display 472 increases at the timing when the chance up effect is derived.

  In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (l), in the scene 1, the mode (motif) of the impression time display 471 changes to a deformed mode corresponding to the notice effect (strong notice), and the effect button 125 is operated. There may be a case where a button effect (reach chance up effect) indicating that the degree of expectation that the notice effect is derived is high, such as a guidance display indicating that the user continues to perform, is derived. If the effect button 125 continues to be operated during the button effect operation acceptance period (valid period), the parameter display 472 increases, and if the derivation of “strong notice” is determined, the default is displayed. The parameter display 472 of the impression time display 471 is full, and “strong notice” is derived at the timing when the scene shifts to the scene 2. Note that the reach chance up effect ends when the scene 2 is entered, and the parameter display 472 also returns to the original display. In addition, the reach chance up effect may be derived even when the “strong notice” is not derived. In this case, the deformed parameters are not filled and the process shifts to the second scene. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 41 (i), when the pseudo stop mode is derived as if the decorative symbol variation display is stopped, the parameter display 472 does not become “0”. Thereby, by confirming the parameter display 472, it can be recognized that the variable display still continues (in this example, the jackpot is taught).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (j), even if the reach pattern is the same as that in FIG. 41 (g), if the remaining amount of the parameter display 472 is large at the same timing, the big hit expectation is relatively high. It will be a chance up display.

  Furthermore, FIG. 42 (m), FIG. 42 (n), FIG. 42 (o), and FIG. 42 (p) show a super reach effect with a relatively high expectation. In particular, FIG. 42 (o) shows a settlement effect. As described above, a long pattern, a short pattern, or the like is selected depending on the result of the success / failure lottery, the selected performance pattern, or the like. This length can also be estimated by the parameter display 472. However, the height of the parameter display 472 does not completely correspond to the remaining time of the settlement effect. For example, the height of the parameter display 472 may be 1 cm when the remaining time is 1 second. It may be a centimeter. The higher the jackpot expectation level, the more the parameter display 472 is left, and the transition to the final effect is made.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is necessary to grasp a scene in the decorative symbol variation display. Hereinafter, the scene grasping process for setting the scene counter used for grasping the variable display scene performed in the display setting process in step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the value of the scene counter is “0”. If the determination in step S4601 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is not performed, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4601, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not the value of the scene grasp timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4602, in step S4603, the main effect of the variable display (effect display) on the decoration display device 42 is interrupted (a cut-in effect or a button effect as a sub effect is performed). It is determined whether or not the interruption flag indicating that the current state is on.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4603, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4603, in step S4604, the value of the scene grasping timer is decremented by “1”, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, each time the display setting process is performed, the interruption flag is confirmed, and when the interruption flag is turned off, a process of advancing the variable display (main effect) of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. On the other hand, when the interruption flag is turned on, processing for maintaining the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. That is, it is determined whether it is a cut-in effect or a button effect, and in the case of a cut-in effect, a process for displaying a still image of the cut-in effect as it is is performed. In the case of button production, if it is the reception display period, the reception display is derived, and the decoration design in the middle symbol display area continues to fluctuate at high speed in the background of the reception display. Display processing for deriving the corresponding moving image or still image to fill the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4602, it is determined in step S4605 whether or not the value of the scene counter is “1”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4605, a value corresponding to the time of scene 2 is set in the scene grasping timer in step S4606. After step S4606, in step S4611, the value of the scene counter is incremented by 1 (the value of the scene counter becomes “2”), and this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4605, it is determined in step S4607 whether or not the value of the scene counter is “2”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4607, a value corresponding to the time of scene 3 is set in the scene grasping timer in step S4608. After step S4608, in step S4611, the value of the scene counter is incremented by 1 (the value of the scene counter becomes “3”), and this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4607, it is determined in step S4609 whether the value of the scene counter is “3”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4609, in step S4610, a value corresponding to the final scene finalizing time is set in the scene grasp timer. As will be described in detail later, the “settlement effect” time of the last scene may be changed after the start of the change display, so the final decision is made at the timing when the last scene arrives. A value corresponding to the production time is set in the scene grasp timer. After step S4610, in step S4611, the value of the scene counter is incremented by 1 (the value of the scene counter becomes “4”), and this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4609, it is determined in step S4612 whether the value of the scene counter is “4”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4612, in step S4613, a value corresponding to the last scene result teaching effect time is set in the scene grasp timer. Note that there is a variation display of a pattern in which a “settlement effect” composed of (almost) still images, repeated videos, slow motion videos, etc. is not derived in the last scene. Therefore, for the sake of convenience, the period (time) from the start of the last scene to the start of the result teaching effect will be described as the period (time) of the final effect even for such a variable display. After step S4613, in step S4611, the value of the scene counter is incremented by 1 (the value of the scene counter becomes “5”), and this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4612, it is determined in step S4614 whether or not the value of the scene counter is “5”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4614, that is, if the last scene has ended, in step S4615, a value corresponding to the fluctuation interval (1 second in this example) is set in the scene grasp timer. In the present embodiment, a display mode in which the decorative design is slightly shaken is derived in the variation interval. After step S4615, in step S4611, the value of the scene counter is incremented by 1 (the value of the scene counter becomes “5”), and this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4614, that is, if the variable interval timer has expired, the value of the scene counter is set to “0” in step S4616, and then this process ends. In addition, in the variation interval after the end of the variation display, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the flat eye of the even symbol, although the jackpot of “15RS” to which the probability variation mode is given is won. There may be a case where a redrawing effect is derived in which the even-numbered doublet that is stopped (slightly swinging due to the variable interval period) may be changed to the odd-numbered doublet. Also good.

  Next, the sub effect process for deriving the sub effect performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not a sub effect standby flag indicating that a sub effect is scheduled to be derived is set on. Whether or not to perform the sub-effect is determined in step S4503 when the variable display is set as described above. If it is determined that the sub-effect is performed, step S4503 is performed. , The sub effect standby flag, the cut-in effect flag, or the button effect flag is set on.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4801, it is determined in step S4802 whether or not the value of the sub effect timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4802, the value of the sub effect timer is decremented by 1 in step S4803, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, the sub effect standby flag is turned off in step S4804. In the subsequent step S4805, it is determined whether or not the cut-in effect flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4805, processing for deriving a cut-in effect is performed in step S4806.

  After step S4806, in step S4807, with reference to the sub effect time storage area (the information indicating the time of the sub effect is stored in step S4506 at the start of variation), the cut effect effect time with respect to the sub effect timer Set the value corresponding to. In the following step S4808, after the interruption flag is set to ON, this processing is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4805, that is, if a button effect is to be performed, a reception display setting process for deriving a reception display in the button effect is performed in step S4809.

  In subsequent step S4810, the sub effect time storage area is referred to, and a value corresponding to the time of the reception display period is set for the sub effect timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to the longest time of the reception display period when the effect button 125 is not operated during the reception display period is set.

  Thereafter, the interruption flag is set to ON in step S4811. In step S4812, an operation indicating that the operation of the effect button 125 in the button effect is in an effective state (the state in which an effect corresponding to the operation must be derived). After the valid flag is set to on, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4801, it is determined in step S4813 whether or not the cut-in effect flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4813, that is, if a cut-in effect is being performed, it is determined in step S4814 whether or not the value of the sub effect timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4814, in step S4815, the value of the sub effect timer is decremented by 1, and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4814, a process for terminating the cut-in effect is performed in step S4816. In subsequent step S4817, the interruption flag is turned off, and in step S4818, the cut-in effect flag is turned off. It should be noted that when the interruption flag is turned off, the progress of the main effect that has been interrupted is resumed. After step S4818, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4813, it is determined in step S4819 whether the button effect flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S4819, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4819, that is, if the button effect is being performed, it is determined in step S4820 whether or not the value of the sub effect timer is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4820, it is determined in step S4821 whether or not there is operation information on the effect button 125. If a negative determination is made in step S4821, the value of the sub effect timer is decremented by 1 in step S4815, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4821, it is determined in step S4822 whether the operation valid flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S4822, that is, if the effect button 125 is operated during the result display period, the value of the sub effect timer is decremented by 1 in step S4815, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4822, that is, if the effect button 125 is operated during the reception display period, processing for reading the value of the sub-effect timer is performed in step S4823. That is, the reception display period ends early by operating the effect button 125 before the reception display period expires. Furthermore, since the button effect is performed by interrupting the progress of the main effect, the length of the variable display changes when the length of the button effect is shortened. In this regard, the present embodiment is configured to increase the length of the final scene finalizing time by the amount of time that the button directing time is shortened.

  More specifically, in step S4824 following step S4823, the value of the sub effect timer read in step S4823, that is, if there is no operation of the effect button 125, is derived from the value stored in the settlement effect time storage area. A value corresponding to the remaining time of the reception display period that should have been added is added, and the value is stored (overwritten) in the settlement effect time storage area. As a result, the time for the finalizing effect is reset so that the time for the finalizing effect becomes longer by the amount that the time for the button effect becomes shorter.

  In addition, as described above, the finalization effect teaches the result of the fluctuation display in the main effect, that is, the result of the lottery or the like (there is a possibility that the probability change may be concealed. It is a production performed immediately before. In addition, as described above, the time chart showing the schematic configuration of the decorative symbol variation display of FIGS. 47 and 48 is mainly the animation of the character as shown in FIGS. 42 (m) to 42 (p). This corresponds to the variable display in the case where the main effect is performed in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the corresponding combinations after the result of the lottery is taught or suggested in the animation. Incidentally, FIG. 42 (o) shows the final effect, and after the still image of the figure is derived for a predetermined time, the left character takes the flag (not shown) (in this case, the decorative design is displayed on the screen). It is displayed in a small state in the upper left), and after the video for which the left character is delighted to win is derived for a predetermined time, the result is taught until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a large winning combination over the entire screen It has been directed.

  After step S4824, the operation valid flag is turned off in step S4825, and in step S4826, a result display setting process for displaying result teaching indicating the result of the button effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 48, in this embodiment, even when the effect button 125 is not operated during the reception display period (operation valid period), a corresponding result display (for example, button operation is performed after the reception display period). Indication that the character regrets that it was not) is derived. Further, in the present embodiment, when the player performs a preferable display in the result display according to the operation of the effect button 125 during the reception display period, when the display is not preferable, and when the operation of the effect button 125 is performed during the reception display period. In any case where it is not performed, the length of the reception display period is the same regardless of the operation timing of the effect button 125.

  Thereafter, in step S4827, a value corresponding to the time of the result display period is set for the sub effect timer, and then the present process ends. Note that, in the variable display where the main effect in which the result of the lottery determination or the like is not taught other than the combination of the stop display of the decorative symbol is mainly performed, the variation of the main effect mainly including the character animation is performed. Compared to the display, the result teaching effect time is set shorter, and in particular, when the settlement effect is not derived, the result teaching effect time is shorter (same or shorter).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4820, it is determined in step S4828 whether the operation valid flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4828, that is, if the acceptance display period ends (expires), the process proceeds to step S4825, the operation valid flag is turned off, a result display setting process is performed in step S4826, and in step S4827 After the value corresponding to the time of the result display period is set in the sub effect timer, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4828, that is, if the result display period has ended, processing for ending the button effect is performed in step S4829, the interruption flag is turned off in step S4830, and in step S4831 After the button effect flag is turned off, this process is terminated.

  Next, the winning display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command for notifying the start of the big hit state is received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, the round grasp counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds is set to “15RS” or “15RN” based on the information included in the opening command. If there is, “15” is set, and “2RS” is set to “2”.

  Thereafter, in step S4703, if there is a big hit with a ball, the setting of the opening effect for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, the lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this process is performed. finish. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like for storing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various rendering modes in the jackpot state. Select and let it run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether a round command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if there is a big hit with a ball, an effect during a round of 30 seconds at the maximum is set, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if it is a big hit with a ball in step S4708, the effect is set during the 4-second interval, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined in step S4709 whether an ending command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if a big hit with a ball is set in step S4711, an ending effect is set for 10 seconds, and then this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit with no appearance, each period such as an opening period (2 seconds), a round period (0.4 seconds), an interval period (1 second), and an ending period (1 second) Rather than setting the production by division, settings are made so that production (announcement, etc.) is performed throughout the entire period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether a hit end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, in step S4713, the ending display is immediately terminated, and the normal gaming state mode in which the variable display is performed is set. In other words, it is determined whether a time-short start command, a probability change start command, or a precursor stage start command is received, and an effect stage corresponding to the game mode is derived. After step S4713, this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3908, a variation stop process related to the stop of variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is executed. Here, the fluctuation stop process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not a stop command (see step S821 of the special display control process) has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4401, this processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, processing for stopping and displaying the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed in step S4402.

  After step S4402, it is determined in step S4403 whether a support end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4403, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, in step S4404, processing is performed to change the effect stage displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 from “retraction stage” to “normal stage”. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process in step S3909, the lighting pattern of the lamp / lights is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device.

  In the sound setting process in step S3910, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a voice-related command such as an error notification is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3910.

  In step S3911, other processing such as control setting of the customer waiting effect is performed. That is, when the state in which the player is not playing continues for a specified time, the decoration pattern display device 42 does not display a decoration symbol as a waiting for customer effect (alternatively) A series of moving images are displayed or a still image is displayed), and a demonstration screen display such as a dark screen is derived.

  In step S3912, an external output process is executed in which a control signal based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3912 is transmitted to each device. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps S3905 to S3912 performed every 2 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3913, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Is determined. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 261.

  If no power off occurrence information is stored, the process advances to step S3914 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3913 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3915. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  As described above in detail, in the present embodiment, the final effect as the (last) impression effect that is performed immediately before the result teaching effect display is the final excitement of the decorative symbol variation display performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In the situation where it is felt that the occurrence of the big hit state can be expected due to the production pattern of each scene of the variable display, the time of the settlement production is relatively long to make the settlement production flashy or make a stronger impression It is easy to set long.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the time for the cut-in effect and the button effect as the sub-effect is set according to the time used for the effect, for example, used for the effect. When it is desired to lengthen the time, by shortening the sub-effect, it is possible to secure the time for the final effect without increasing the length of the entire variable display. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily adjust the amount of change time, and even if the time of finalizing effects varies (even if it is not fixed), the special display device 43a indicates the start and end timings of change display. , 43b can be reliably synchronized with the fluctuation display performed at 43b.

  In addition, the adjustment corresponding to the length of time of the settlement effect is performed not in the main effect but in the sub effect. When the sub effect is performed, the main effect is interrupted, or the specific effect in the main effect ( For example, since the derivation timing of the settlement effect or the like is delayed, the sub-effect is covered with a predetermined effect (specific effect) in the main effect, so that the predetermined effect ( It is possible to avoid a situation where the specific performance is not derived (or shortened). Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which predetermined information (specific effect) in the main effect is skipped or difficult to recognize, and the variation display can be more fully enjoyed.

  In addition, for cut-in effects and button effects as sub-effects, at least a part of the same movie is repeatedly derived, or the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined movie is in slow motion It is composed of derived effects. For this reason, by changing the time of the production, even if the derivation period is shortened, there is little discomfort, and control for lengthening can be performed relatively easily. Therefore, the effect display of the effect display means can be made to proceed relatively smoothly, and the effect balance can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the last scene time determination table and the last scene time lottery table as impression presentation time setting tables used for setting the final presentation time are used for setting the final presentation pattern. It is provided separately from the table used (impression effect pattern setting table). For this reason, the effect pattern and the derived time of the settlement effect are stored as a set (the impression effect time setting table and the impression effect pattern setting table are combined into one, and the pattern A is 5 seconds, 6 seconds for pattern A, 7 seconds for pattern A, 5 seconds for pattern B, 6 seconds for pattern B, 7 seconds for pattern B, etc.) Etc. can be achieved. In particular, in the configuration in which the time of the settlement effect can be changed after the start of fluctuation, such an effect is more remarkably exhibited.

  Further, in the decorative display variation display, when an effect pattern with a high degree of winning expectation is derived before the final effect, the time for the final effect is set to be relatively long regardless of the effect pattern of the final effect. More specifically, the decorative display variation display is divided into scene 1, scene 2, scene 3, and the last scene, and a combination of effect patterns selected in the scene before the last scene (this example) Then, the length of the time of the last scene is determined based on the total jackpot expectation degree of scenes 1 to 3 and the result of the winning / failing lottery (whether or not to win the jackpot). In other words, the length of time of the last scene depends on what kind of effect (hereinafter referred to as “effect display for each scene”) in the scene up to the last scene in the decorative pattern variation display. Are different. For this reason, for example, in the situation where the last scene is reached and it is felt that the occurrence of the big hit state can be expected based on the scene-specific effect display derived in the scene before the last scene, the time of the last scene is relatively In the situation display that is long and derived in the scene before the last scene, in the situation where you can not expect the occurrence of the big hit state, by configuring the last scene time to be relatively short, The place to be raised can be surely raised, and when it is not necessary to raise, it can be done relatively easily. Therefore, it is possible to provide a last scene that closely matches the image of the player who visually recognizes the variation display of the decorative symbols, and the game can be progressed without any difficulty.

  For this reason, the feelings that have been raised in the scene before the last scene can be digested by firmly hitting the final production of the relatively long last scene. You can avoid bad things). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by improving the balance between the effect display and the expected expectation. Moreover, since the expectation level is changed by changing the time instead of changing the production pattern of the final production, it is avoided that the combination of production patterns is uniform, and by changing the production pattern Control complexity can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the variation display of decorative symbols, if the winning expectation level is not increased by the final effect (last scene), even if an effect pattern with a high expected expectation level is derived in the final effect (last scene), The settlement effect is not lengthened, and a relatively short settlement effect is derived. Accordingly, it is possible to refrain from derivation of a long pattern settlement effect in a situation where the player feels that the game is excessive (unnecessarily long) in the settlement effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by improving the balance between the effect display and the expected expectation.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the button effect as a sub effect is derived in the scene 3 of the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, the main effect is interrupted (the main effect does not proceed, and the main effect is not changed). It is maintained, that is, what is stopped continues to stop and what is fluctuating continues to fluctuate). For this reason, the maximum time when the effect button 125 is not operated is set as the time allotted to the button effect at the start of the change, but the effect button 125 is operated in the button effect. In such a case, the length of the button effect is changed, and the main effect is shifted (for example, the timing for shifting to the final effect is shifted).

  In this regard, according to the time used for such a sub-effect, the time of the final effect as the impression time performed immediately before the result teaching effect is appropriately set (when the time of the sub-effect is determined after the start of the variable display) Set the time of the finalization effect once again at the start of the finalization effect), so that you can adjust the total time of the variable display of the decorative symbols, and specially display the start and end timing of the variable display It is possible to reliably synchronize with the variable display performed by the devices 43a and 43b.

  Furthermore, the settlement effect is an effect in which the same moving image is repeatedly derived, or the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion. There is little discomfort, and control for lengthening can be performed relatively easily. Accordingly, by making it possible to derive the sub-effects, it is possible to relatively smoothly advance the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 while improving the performance, thereby improving the effect balance.

  In addition, when the sub effect is performed, the main effect is interrupted and the derivation timing of the specific effect (settlement effect, etc.) in the main effect is delayed, so the sub effect is a predetermined effect in the main effect. By covering with (specific production), it is possible to avoid a situation in which the predetermined production (specific production) is not derived in the main production. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which predetermined information (specific effect) in the main effect is skipped or difficult to recognize, and the variation display can be more fully enjoyed.

  Furthermore, the final effect, which is an impression effect, is the last scene of the main effect, and is performed immediately before the result teaching effect. In other words, the settlement effect is an effect in which the same movie is repeatedly derived, or the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined movie is derived in slow motion. Derived in the previous stage of suggestion, it is optimal as an effect that excites what the results of the winning / failing lottery will be. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by derivation of the finalizing effect immediately before the teaching effect as a result of the last scene, it is possible to arrange the finalizing effect after the sub-effects, and in the finalizing effect, it is ensured that the time of the variable display is adjusted. In addition, a synergistic effect is achieved in that the last of the variable display can be raised by the finalization effect.

  In addition, since the time of the sub effect is set according to the time of the final effect at the start of the variation of the decorative design, when the production pattern that can be expected to generate the big hit state is selected, the variation display of the decorative design If you want to set a longer time for the finalizing effect to make the last part of the game more exciting, set the time for the finalizing effect to be longer at the start of the decorative display of the decorative design, so that the time for the sub-effect will be set relatively shorter. Even if it is determined that the time of the sub-effect is the longest after the display is started, the time of the final effect can be secured to some extent.

  Further, since the time other than the final effect in the main effect is not changed after the start of the variable display, the above-described effect of avoiding that the sub effect is subjected to the specific effect of the main effect is more reliably achieved.

  In this embodiment, the special display devices 43a and 43b having an important role of teaching the result of the lottery determination are reliably controlled by the main control device 261, and the control of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by the sub-control device 262. (And the display control device 45) is responsible for ensuring the accuracy of display in the special display devices 43a and 43b and avoiding an increase in the control burden on the main control device 261, while maintaining the aspect of the decorative symbol display device 42. Complexity and diversification can be achieved.

  Further, since the main control device 261 determines the time for variable display in the special display devices 43a and 43b (hereinafter referred to as the variable time), the decorative symbol display performed in synchronization with the variable display in the special display devices 43a and 43b. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the device 42 is also determined by the main controller 261. Therefore, if the time length of the last scene is increased within the variation time determined by the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 shortens the time length of the previous scene and the time of the last scene. If the length of the scene is shortened, the time of the last scene is lengthened, and the time of the last scene is determined by determining the time of the scene before the last scene according to the time of the last scene. Even if it carries out, it can synchronize the fluctuation display of the decoration design display apparatus 42 with the fluctuation display of the special display apparatuses 43a and 43b (the timing of a start and an end is made the same).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the scene-specific effect display having a low total expectation level and a low expectation level of the last scene is selected in spite of the variable display corresponding to the jackpot, the time of the last scene is selected. It is relatively easy to select a long pattern. As a result, even in the last scene, even if the expected level of jackpot on the effect display by scene is low, the expected level of jackpot when the scene-specific effect display is derived in a long pattern can be further improved. Therefore, when a combination of scene-specific effects displays with a high total expectation is derived and a scene-specific effects display with a pattern with a low jackpot expectation is derived in the last scene, how long the last scene is Even if it is carried out, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player's feelings are lowered.

  Even when the decorative design is made to appear as if it has been stopped and displayed once in a combination of detachment, and the restart effect in which the decorative design is changed again is performed (in the case of the special pattern 2), the special display device is used. 43a and 43b are within the fluctuation time. For this reason, for example, it is possible to reliably execute an effect (for example, a re-lottery effect in the case of a big win) or the like performed in a variable interval. By the way, the production performed in the variable interval is appropriately set for each model, and the configuration in which the re-lottery production is not performed (the entire variable interval after the jackpot teaching may be used for the opening production), It may be configured such that a re-lottery effect is always performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the impression time display 471 in which the remaining period and the jackpot expectation degree are associated with the decorative pattern is displayed as the decorative pattern with respect to the predetermined decorative pattern variation display (variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b). The display device 42 (right part of the display area) can be derived. For this reason, in addition to the basic information that if there is a remaining time, a chance is left and the result is confirmed if there is no remaining time, the progress of the variable display in the decorative symbol display device 42 and the impression time display 471. By comparing with the remaining period indicated by (1), it is possible to give a game such as watching the change display while predicting what kind of effect may be derived in the future. In other words, for example, the point at which the decorative display of the decorative symbol may end is approaching, but the impression time display 471 does not feel that the variable display has yet ended. You can add ways to enjoy yourself.

  Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the display of the impression time display means only indicates the remaining period of the predetermined fluctuation display, the impression time of what kind of presentation is derived in relation to the presentation display corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation display. It is possible to increase the number of variations of indications on the display means (not only that the fluctuation display has not yet ended, but also how much the high-winning expectation effect is derived), and more diverse A complicated production can be performed. Further, the length of the last scene can be inferred according to the aspect of the impression time display 471. The last scene can be estimated by comparing the effect display for each scene of the last scene with the impression time display 471. A game can be added such as whether a pattern is selected or the like and a result is estimated. In addition, an effect such as a contradiction effect can be added on the premise of the operation of the player to compare.

  Further, the impression time display 471 is configured such that the parameter display 472 gradually decreases as the variable display progresses and becomes “0” as the variable display ends. For this reason, the remaining time can be estimated from the change in the appearance of the impression time display 471 over time, and the expected degree of jackpot can be estimated, and the enjoyment by the estimation can be fully enjoyed.

  Further, when an effect pattern with “big” or “high” jackpot expectation is selected in each scene of variable display, the parameter display 472 increases at a predetermined timing in each scene. . For this reason, even if the contents of the variable display are the same, a situation occurs in which the amount of the parameter display 472 is different at the same timing, and the larger the amount of the parameter display 472, the higher the jackpot expectation. . Thereby, the impression time display 471 whose aspect changes with the progress of the variation display of the decorative design can be made more interesting, and the impression time display 471 and the variation display (big hit expectation degree) are more closely entangled. An effect can be derived.

  In the present embodiment, the parameter display 472 is configured to increase when an effect associated with an increase in the degree of jackpot expectation is derived from the variation display of decorative symbols. Therefore, compared with the configuration in which only the parameter display 472 increases secretly, it can be more easily recognized that the degree of expectation for jackpot is increased. Therefore, interest in the impression time display 471 can be further increased.

  In addition, the impression time display 471 is derived from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display. For this reason, the change of the big hit expectation over time of the dynamic display can be more reflected in the impression time display 471, and the impression time display 471 can be made more interesting. In addition, for a player who has never played the pachinko machine 10, the impression time display 471 can be used as a guide for what kind of effect the impression time display 471 has, and the effect of being able to easily become familiar with the game quickly. Will be played even more.

  In addition, in the state in which the parameter display 472 remains in the impression time display 471 and the remaining period of the variable display is displayed, before the remaining period of the variable display ends, the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 ends. Such a pseudo stop mode (pseudo end effect) can be derived. In other words, it seemed as though the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 had ended, but when the impression time display 471 was confirmed, the predetermined variable display did not end, so the variable display continues further. With a sense of security that does not end, such as going, you can look forward to the development that the direction display still continues. Therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to feel a sense of superiority, and to improve interests.

  In addition, in the impression time display 471, a reference line 474 indicating the amount at the start of variation in the parameter display 472 and an end line 473 indicating the amount at the end of variation are displayed. For this reason, it is possible to make it easier to grasp the current point of time in the decorative symbol variation display, whether the parameter display 472 has increased, or the like. Therefore, the player can easily determine whether or not the state of the variable display is good based on the impression time display 471.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display is divided into four scenes, but the number of scenes, the timing of switching scenes, and the like can be appropriately set for each model. Further, the number of scenes may be different depending on the decorative pattern variation pattern (reach pattern). Moreover, in the said embodiment, the aspect of the various effects derived | led-out in the variable display of a decoration design etc. are not specifically limited, It can set suitably for every model. Furthermore, in each scene, one or more presentation items for which the jackpot expectation degree is set may be set. For example, in scene 2, a notice effect may be derived after a button effect, and in scene 3, a cut-in effect (displaceable between the retracted position and the functional position can be performed together with the development of super reach. It is also possible to derive a movable effect) by which a movable effect to be displaced to a functional position is derived, and then derive a button effect. In addition, a chance-up effect or a sub-effect (mini character display, cut-in effect, button effect, etc.) may be derived so as to straddle a plurality of scenes.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when starting the variable display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 42, the time (pattern) of the last scene is determined according to the total expectation level of the scenes 1-3 and the expectation level of the last scene. At the same time, as the time of the last scene is shortened, the basic time of the cut-in effect and the button effect, which are sub-effects performed in the scene 3, is configured to be shortened, but the time is shortened by subtraction. The effect to be performed is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be configured not to deal with one scene among scenes before the last scene but to deal with a plurality of scenes (dispersion of increase / decrease in time). In this case, it can be made difficult to notice that each scene is longer or shorter than usual.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, when the decoration pattern starts to change, the length of the last scene (decision effect) is determined based on the effect pattern of each scene, the result of the lottery determination, and the like. The time length of the scene (sub-effect) is determined (the time of the sub-effect is determined based on the time of the final effect), but the times of all the scenes are determined at once. Alternatively, after the time of the sub effect is determined, the time of the final effect may be determined according to the time of the sub effect.

  (B) In the above embodiment, the cut-in effect and the button effect that can be derived in the scene 3 correspond to the sub effect, and the final effect of the final scene corresponds to the impression effect (last impression effect). However, the aspect of sub-effects and impression effects, the timing of derivation, the derivation frequency, etc. are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. For example, there may be a pattern in which an impression effect is performed and a sub-effect is not performed, or there is a pattern in which a sub-effect (for example, having a constant time) is performed and an impression effect is not performed. Furthermore, you may comprise so that a sub effect may be performed across scenes.

  Also, the impression effect does not necessarily have to be performed immediately before the result teaching effect, and there is another effect between the impression effect and the result teaching effect, or the impression effect is derived multiple times in one variation display. However, it is desirable that at least one impression effect be derived after the sub-effect whose time length is fixed after the variable display is started. Furthermore, it is desirable that the impression effect, which is a relatively simple aspect, is performed immediately before the result teaching effect. Further, even when the impression effect is derived a plurality of times, it is desirable that the time is adjusted at the last time (the time of the impression effect other than the last is not changed). In this case, the impression effect for which time adjustment is performed is derived in the middle of the variable display, or is derived many times, so that the player notices that the length of the impression effect changes during the variable display. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is impossible to concentrate on subsequent development. Moreover, it can be avoided that the impression display is generated a plurality of times (excessively), thereby causing the fluctuation display to be excessively complicated or causing the control to become complicated (waste).

  In addition, “the effect that the same still image is continuously derived or the predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion” described as the explanation of the settlement effect is that the predetermined still image is zoomed at any time or in stages. It is intended to include a display that is up or slid, a display in which the image is the same or substantially the same, but a color change (including whiteout and blackout), and the like. In other words, the impression effect is intended to have almost no change in the visual appearance from the start to the end. Further, for example, in the finalization effect, it may be configured to perform a button effect in which the effect button 125 is repeatedly hit or long pressed until the result teaching effect.

  The final effect (impression effect, last impression effect) is not an effect in which the same moving image is repeatedly derived, or the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion ( It may be configured as follows. In addition, in the said embodiment, you may comprise so that there may be a pattern in which a sub effect is abbreviate | omitted as a result of setting a settlement effect long.

  The cut-in effect may also be configured such that the length may be changed after the variable display is started. For example, in scene 1, a selection effect in which the player selects an effect content is derived using the operation of the effect button 125, and the type of the cut-in effect is changed according to the selection content. Good.

  Further, the cut-in effect time (performed in the scene before the last scene) may be configured not to be a target to be shortened by subtracting the time according to the initial setting of the last scene time. That is, the cut-in effect is (almost) a still image (which may be accompanied by an accessory effect), and it is easy for the player to count the derivation time. For this reason, by counting the time of the cut-in effect, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the time of the last scene is estimated and the result of the variable display becomes transparent.

  Moreover, although the result display of the button effects in the above embodiment is substantially a cut-in effect, for example, when the effect button 125 is operated, a result display period is not provided. The main effect mode (effect pattern) may be switched (eg, there are a plurality of stages and the stage is shifted to a preferable stage at the timing). For example, a lottery is performed based on the operation of the effect button 125. However, the content of the result display may be determined according to the lottery result (the mode and length of the result display period are determined at that time). In this case, the performance can be improved.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to employ a button effect using the effect button 125 as a final effect. For example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, by pressing the effect button 125 within the effective period of the button effect derived at the time of the final effect, and continuing to press the button as it is, the button effect is displayed at the start of the result teaching effect. In the case of a jackpot, the button effect continues to be derived even if the result teaching effect is started, and the button effect is taught, or in the case of a promising jackpot, the button effect is displayed even if the jackpot opening effect is started. You may comprise so that a production | presentation may continue being derived | led-out and a probability variation jackpot may be taught. In this case, the time of the final effect is shortened and the timing of the end of the button effect is the end of the final effect, the end of the result teaching effect (at the end of the variable display), the end of the opening effect, etc. Combined with the condition (the timing and number can be appropriately set for each model), the last of the variable display can be made more interesting.

  (C) In the above-described embodiment, when the effect button 125 is operated in the button effect that is the sub effect, and the button effect time set in advance for the longest time is shortened, only that amount. In this configuration, the time for the settlement effect is reset (the time for the settlement effect is determined based on the time for the sub-effect). However, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. That is, for example, in the above-described embodiment, even when the operation of the effect button 125 is not performed during the button effect reception display period, the result display is performed for the same time as when the operation is performed. If no operation is performed, a result display may not be derived. In this case, when the effect button 125 is not operated, the button effect time may be the shortest. Correspondingly, at the start of the variation of the decorative design, the time when the button effect is the shortest is set, and when the button effect is extended by operating the effect button 125, only the extended amount The time for the settlement effect may be reset again.

  For example, even if the sub-effect is in a state where the main effect is performed without interruption, the time for the final effect is not changed after the start of the change (even if it is not changed). The decorative symbol variation display may be completed in synchronization with the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b).

  In addition, even if the time of the settlement effect is set longer at the start of the fluctuation, the settlement effect may be lengthened by operating the effect button 125 immediately after the start of the reception display period (operation valid period) in the button effect. Is done. That is, if the settlement effect is set to be short, the reception display period is lengthened, and when the effect button 125 is immediately pressed in the button effect and the reception display period ends immediately, the remaining time of the reception display period is added to the settlement effect ( There is a concern that the finalized time will not be shortened). In this regard, when the reception display period is set to be equal to or longer than the specified time, the start of the operation valid period may be delayed from the start of the reception display period. In this case, despite the fact that the settlement effect is set to be short at the start of the change, the effect button 125 is immediately pressed in the button effect and the acceptance display period ends immediately, so that the time for the settlement effect is increased. The situation where it is done can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when this configuration is adopted, the period from the start of the button effect (acceptance display period) to the operation enabled state is the operation disabled state, but the button is enabled so that this period can be passed without a sense of incongruity. A plurality of operation methods of the effect button 125 in the period may be prepared, and the operation method to be selected may be limited according to the length of the period. For example, if this period is long (if you want to keep a gap), press and hold, repeatedly hit (the maximum number of times is high, the time limit is long), and operate according to the timing indicated on the gaming machine side When the timing tap to be received (long period) is selected, and when such a period is short (when it is desired to shorten it as much as possible), an operation with a limited number of times, a timing tap (short period) is selected. It may be configured.

  In this case, if the operation method of the effect button 125 is different, there is a difference in the time from when the effect button 125 is operated until the display result of the button effect is recognized. For this reason, according to the length of the time of the button effect, the pattern of the operation method of the effect button 125 is set in a flexible manner, thereby suppressing the uncomfortable feeling caused by the length of the time of the button effect. The result display of the button effect can be reliably derived.

  In the above embodiment, when the cut-in effect or the button effect is derived, the jackpot expectation degree determined by the sub control device 262 is determined regardless of the pattern or whether the effect button is actually operated. Although it is fixed (medium) and is configured so as not to affect the time of the last scene, etc., it is configured so that the expectation of jackpot changes depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the pattern and the production button 125 Also good. For example, when the production button 125 is operated in the button production, and the production with high expectation is derived in the result display period as the reaction, the result display period is shortened (rapidly), and the settlement production is lengthened accordingly. You may comprise.

  In addition, regarding the impression time display 471, even if the button effect is derived, if the effect button 125 is not operated during the corresponding button effective period (the effect operation enabled state), the change in the display mode corresponding to the button effect (parameter) (Increase in display 472) does not occur. For example, the parameter display 472 may decrease or increase or decrease in the same way as when the operation is not performed. You may comprise.

  However, when the button effect is only derived, it is configured so that the big hit expectation corresponding to the operation effect display of the bag derived when the effect button 125 is operated is not reflected in the impression time display 471. It is easier to match the expectation of the time display 471 with the evaluation of the player's variation display in the flow where the player has visually recognized the variation display of the decorative design, and the effect button 125 can be operated during the button production. Thus, since more accurate information on the degree of jackpot expectation can be obtained, it is possible to further increase the interest in the button effect, and to improve the game motivation by more actively participating in the game.

  Further, when the button effect is adopted as the settlement effect, it may be configured to change the aspect such as the main effect according to the aspect of the impression time display 471 (the amount of the parameter display 472, etc.). For example, each time the effect button 125 is operated, the parameter display 472 decreases by a predetermined amount, and the background color of the decorative symbol display device 42 can change accordingly (the larger the amount, the higher the chance). Also good. In this case, the player can be synergistically attracted to both the button effect and the impression time display 471. When a button effect is performed in the middle of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the parameter display 472 of the impression time display 471 does not become “0” even if the effect button 125 is operated.

  Also, according to the button effect in the settlement effect (the corresponding display is derived in the settlement effect even if no button operation is performed (the operation is switched to the invalid state during the period of the settlement effect and the corresponding effect is derived)) In the case where no button operation is performed, there is no particular effect until the result teaching effect (a display prompting button operation continues to be derived, etc.) Further, the above embodiment may be adopted. Then, it is configured to derive a display in which the parameter display 472 gradually decreases as the variable display progresses. However, when adopting a configuration in which the parameter display 472 is decreased, the parameter display 472 gradually increases. It is not necessary to perform a display that decreases.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, when the effect button 125 is operated during the button effect, the effect pattern derived in the decorative symbol display device 42 correspondingly (as a reaction effect) is determined at the start of the variable display. However, when the player operates the effect button 125 during the button effective period, the value of the button effect random number counter is acquired, and the button effect table selected according to the winning expectation degree of the corresponding scene is referred to. The pattern of the reaction effect to be derived may be determined based on the value of the button effect random number counter.

  Furthermore, you may comprise so that the pattern of the display according to scene of the subsequent scene may be selected according to the reaction effect of a button effect. In addition, the length and timing of the cut-in effect and the button effect (button validity period, etc.) may be different depending on the scene-specific effect display pattern.

  Further, the player operates the effect button 125 and the like to select an effect pattern, and the selected effect pattern (the effect display time by scene becomes the same regardless of which effect pattern is selected). Alternatively, the button effect or cut-in effect (sub-effect) time, the derivation timing, the derivation probability, and the like derived during the process may be different.

  In addition, if the amount of the remaining parameter display 472 does not become the end timing of the finalization effect at the reduction speed of the normal parameter display 472 at the timing of the finalization effect at the latest, It is determined that the button effect is generated in the final effect, and the remainder of the parameter display 472 is excessively reduced in accordance with the operation of the effect button 125 and the effect on the decorative symbol display device 42 accompanying the operation. May be. On the contrary, when there is little remaining parameter display 472 at the timing of the start of the final presentation, and the parameter display 472 decreases at a normal speed, it disappears before the end of the final presentation. In addition, a button effect may be generated in the settlement effect, and an effect such that the parameter display 472 increases accordingly. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production such that the parameter display 472 is increased or decreased before the settlement production. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the timing of the end of the settlement effect and the timing at which the parameter display 472 disappears can be avoided, and it is possible to diversify the sub-effects and improve convenience.

  In addition, the button effect is generated before the final effect, and the mode of the final effect is improved instead of consuming the predetermined amount of the parameter display 472 (when the effect pattern of the final effect is good, before the final effect, It is good also as a structure which can generate | occur | produce the production | generation which produces | generates the button production which consumes the parameter display 472 after the production which the parameter display 472 increases.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, it is described that, in the stage before the settlement effect, the jackpot expectation is increased, and an effect (such as a notice effect) in which the parameter display 472 is relatively large can be derived. However, it may be configured to be able to derive an effect in which the parameter display 472 is relatively reduced in a stage before the final effect. Further, there may be a case where the parameter display 472 is derived in a manner that is larger than usual from the start of the variable display.

  In the above-described embodiment, the parameter display 472 is configured to be 0 when the settlement effect ends. However, the parameter display 472 may be configured to be erased when the settlement effect starts. Furthermore, a display (parameter display or the like) corresponding to the time elapsed from the start of the settlement effect may be derived (in some cases). For example, the occurrence of a jackpot is confirmed when the display is set to a specified amount or more, or the jackpot status is generated when the display is set to a specified amount or more, so that a more desirable type of jackpot state (the number of rounds is It may be configured that it is determined that a large number of high-injection states are imparted).

  In the above embodiment, the parameter display 472 is displayed from the beginning to the end of the decorative symbol variation display (effect display) (it is 0 at the end of the finalization effect, and remains as it is until the variation display ends). However, the parameter display 472 may be configured to be derived from the start of the settlement effect to the end of the settlement effect, or from the start of the variable display to the start of the settlement effect. It may be configured such that it is derived in the lottery, may not be derived in the lottery, or may be configured so that the timing of the derivation is different in the lottery.

  (D) In the above embodiment, the functional position located in front of the decorative symbol display device 42 (display unit) as the effect display means and the retreat position deviating from the front (in the display unit) of the decorative symbol display device 42 A movable accessory (movable accessory) is provided as an effecting means that can be displaced between them, and the movable accessory is displaced to a functional position in response to a sub-effect such as a button effect, a final effect, or a result teaching effect. You may comprise so that an effect production can be derived | led-out. For example, in order to enhance the result display of the button effect, the start and end timings may be derived so as to be synchronized with the result display period. Moreover, it is good also as comprising so that an effect production may be performed at the random timing of a cut-in production. In this case, it is possible to forget the count of the derivation time of the cut-in effect that the player has performed (unconsciously) by the impact of the effect effect being randomly derived in the middle of the cut-in effect. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the situation that the time of the settlement effect is estimated based on the time of the cut-in effect, and as a result, the result of the variable display is also estimated.

  In addition, although not mentioned in particular, various production members (production means) for production such as corresponding audio is derived or lamps as electrical decorations are emitted corresponding to sub-production and finalization production. May be configured to be interlocked with the display on the decorative symbol display device 42. In particular, it can be understood that the effect production by these production means can be generated at random during the sub production, so that the sub production can be excited, and the time of the sub production has been shortened for adjustment related to the final production. Can be difficult. Note that the timing, number of times, length, number of patterns, and the like of the effect production are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model.

  On the other hand, in the settlement effect, the effect effects may be only a pattern derived from the beginning to the end of the settlement effect and a pattern not derived at all. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to understand whether the final effect is a long pattern or a short pattern due to the effect effect.

  (E) In the above embodiment, the length of the last scene is determined based only on the combination of the scene-specific effects displayed in the scenes up to the last scene, regardless of the result of the lottery determination (in some cases) ) May be configured as follows. For example, in a production where the hero makes an animal a friend, the last scene has a long pattern when "dog" is made a friend in scene 1, "monkey" is made a friend in scene 2, and "mochi" is made a friend in scene 3. In the case of a combination of other animals, the last scene may be a short pattern.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gameability from being overwhelmed, such as whether or not the expectation degree of jackpot for each scene effect display is high. However, by taking into account the results of the lottery determination, it is possible to more reliably suppress the situation that causes a decrease in interest, such as frequent presentations with a high expectation level for jackpots even though the winning lottery is not won. be able to.

  (F) In the above embodiment, a plurality of performance patterns having different jackpot expectations are set for the last scene. For example, in the last scene, the result of the previous lottery is taught by taking over the effect of the immediately preceding scene, Alternatively, it may be configured so that there is no element other than the length of time that only suggests and changes the expectation degree of jackpot in the last scene.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when it is determined that a combination of effect display by scene with a high expectation level for big hits is derived in the scenes before the last scene, the last scene is configured to always have a long pattern. However, if the winning expectation of the last scene is low, i.e., if the gap in jackpot expectation between the last scene and the last scene becomes large, the last scene must be a long pattern. When the expectation degree of the big hit of the last scene is medium or high, any of a long pattern, a special pattern, and a short pattern may be set based on a predetermined lottery.

  (G) In the above embodiment, it is determined that the big hit expectation degree of the scene-by-scene effect display of the last scene is high (and it is instructed that the result teaching effect has been won in the result lottery at the end of the effect display). ), The scene-specific effect display of the last scene is forcibly changed to a scene-specific effect display that is determined not to have a high jackpot expectation level based on a predetermined lottery, and the length of the last scene time It is good also as being comprised so that resetting is possible so that it may become a long pattern. In this case, even if the expected level of jackpot of the scene-specific effect display of the last scene is low, the expected level of jackpot when derived in the long pattern can be further improved. Therefore, in the state where the jackpot expectation level is considerably increased in the scene before the last scene, when the scene-specific effect display of the pattern having a low jackpot expectation level is derived in the last scene, how much the scene-specific effect display is long. Even if it is performed in a pattern, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's feelings are lowered.

  (H) In the above embodiment, the corresponding table is referred to based on the combination of the expected degree of jackpot (any of “low”, “medium”, and “high”) of the scene-by-scene effects display of scenes 1 to 3. The total expectation level is determined. For example, a correspondence point storage table for storing the correspondence between the scene-specific effect display and the expectation point indicating the jackpot expectation level is provided, and the front of the last scene is displayed in the decorative symbol variation display. The duration of the last scene is determined based on the result of determining whether the sum of the expected points of the effect display by scene selected in the previous scenes is greater than or equal to the specified value and the result of the lottery You may comprise. In this case, in order to determine the time of the last scene, it is not necessary to judge the combination of the scene-specific effects display selected in the scene before the last scene in the variation display of the decorative pattern, but by judging by the point. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control. In particular, when the number of scenes is relatively large, such operational effects become more prominent.

  (I) The effect button 125 as the effect operation means in the above embodiment is configured such that the operation unit, which is a part that can be operated by the player, can be displaced between the operation position and the non-operation position. However, for example, the operation unit may be configured to be displaceable in a state where the operation unit is not operated. That is, for example, the production button 125 includes an operation unit, an operation detection switch (operation detection unit) capable of detecting the operation unit displaced to the operation position, and a coil spring (energization) that urges the operation unit to the non-operation position side. And the effect button 125 is attached to the operation portion in the non-operated state from the first position. Switching device as switching means for switching to a second state that is positioned at a second position that largely protrudes from the mounted portion (upper plate 19) (driving means that displaces the operating portion between the first position and the second position, etc.) It is good also as providing. For example, an operation effect may be derived in a long pattern finalization effect, and the operation unit may be configured to be in the second position in the operation effect. In this case, the settlement effect can be enlivened and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the suggestion of jackpot expectation degree can be performed with the aspect of the production | presentation button 125 in an operation production. For example, the protrusion length can be adjusted stepwise or steplessly, and the protrusion amount may be changed according to the impression time display 471. In this case, the interest in the impression time display 471 can be further increased. In addition, the effect button 125 can displace the operation portion between the operation position and the non-operation position regardless of whether the operation button is in the first position or the second position (the operation portion displaced to the operation position is detected by the operation detection switch. It may be configured as above. Further, in the settlement effect, a long press effect or a continuous hit effect of the operation unit may be performed.

  (J) In the above-described embodiment, the period waiting time display 471 is always performed when the decorative symbol display device 42 performs the variable display. For example, the impression time display 471 is derived by lottery. It may be configured to determine whether or not. Further, the impression time display 471 can be hidden by an input by operating the player's effect button 125 or cross button 126 (the control for deriving the impression time display 471 is not performed or control that can be derived is performed. However, it may be configured not to be derived only by changing the layer). In particular, it is desirable that the impression time display 471 be configured to be non-displayable with a single touch even during the decorative display variation display. In other words, based on the aspect of the impression time display 471, when it is confirmed that the variation display is likely to be expected, it is ensured that the variation display (scene-specific effect display) with a certain amount of content is derived. In the state, the impression time display 471 is not displayed, and a way of enjoying such as raising the feeling of throb can be selected. As an example of a mode of non-display by one touch, for example, a button as an operation means (for example, an effect button 125) is pressed twice in succession, a lower part of the cross key 126 as an operation means is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 42 The proximity detection means (sensor, touch panel, etc.) capable of detecting an object positioned in front of the hand is used to detect that the object positioned in front of the impression time display 471 has quickly moved (flicked) to the side. Move.

  Furthermore, the aspect of the impression time display 471, the effect using the impression time display 471, and the like are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. For example, instead of a bar graph shape, it may be a pie chart shape or a grid shape (for example, the passage of time is indicated by increasing the number of places to be painted). Moreover, you may show the change of a jackpot expectation degree and remaining time by the aspects (For example, the combination of a dial with a scale and a needle | hook, a number, etc.) like various meter displays. Further, as the impression time display 471, an object image such as a character or a decoration can be displayed adjacent to the parameter display 472, and the jackpot expectation degree or the increase amount of the parameter display 472 (for example, an increase) It is possible to derive characters that can be easily derived in the latent accuracy mode (for example, characters that are easily derived in the latent accuracy mode, characters that can be easily derived in the latent accuracy mode, etc.) It may be configured to suggest that the parameter display 472 is likely to increase as compared to the above, and the visual appearance of the impression time display 471 is likely to be gorgeous. As described above, the impression time display 471 can be made more attractive by suggesting the latent mode according to the aspect of the impression time display 471.

  The remaining time of the variable display may be indicated by a number, and the jackpot expectation may be indicated by the color of the number, but the remaining time becomes too clear, and the fun of the variable display becomes Impressions that indicate the remaining time and the jackpot expectation because there is a concern that the meaning of the color of the numbers may be reduced, or the relationship between the remaining time and the jackpot may be difficult to understand. The time display 471 is desirably indicated by an area or a length.

  Further, the display mode related to the motif of the impression time display 471 may be configured so that the player can set (for example, by performing a mobile linked game described later). In this case, since the player can set the display mode related to the motif of the impression time display 471 to his / her preference, the player can progress the game more happily.

  Note that “the display mode of the impression time display 471 can be set” means that the motif of the impression time display 471 can be changed, the color can be changed, and the like. For example, the shape of the impression time display 471 may be changed from a square to a circle, or the motif of the impression time display 471 may be changed from “dog” to “cat”. Further, depending on the shape or the like of the impression time display 471, the remaining time may be reduced, the way to increase the jackpot expectation degree, or the like may be different. Furthermore, the impression time display 471 may be set by the player operating the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, and information exchange may be performed between the pachinko machine 10 and the server via the portable communication terminal. In the process of performing the mobile linked game, it is performed by operating the mobile communication terminal or personal computer on the web page of the server (the setting information is included in the password issued by the server, and the password is input to the pachinko machine 10) By doing so, the setting information may be reflected).

  Further, for example, the player may be able to set the derivation ratio of the expectation-up effect pattern that increases the parameter display 472 of the impression time display 471. In this case, the interest in the impression time display 471 can be further increased.

  Furthermore, the display position of the impression time display 471 is determined by the player's operation (operation by the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, or a touch panel or proximity detection sensor is provided on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the player moves the hand, etc. It may be configured to be changeable by an operation). In this case, since the player can display the impression time display 471 at a desired position, the comfort of the game can be improved. The size of the impression time display 471 may be configured to be changeable. In addition, the impression time display 471 may be divided into a plurality of (locations) and can be displayed.

  (K) In the above-described embodiment, the impression time display 471 is derived in the decorative symbol display device 42. However, the impression time display 471 can be displayed separately from the decorative symbol display device 42. An apparatus may be provided.

  In addition, regarding the impression time display 471, not only the reference line 474 and the end line 473 but also a scale (for example, equivalent to 2 seconds per scale) is displayed at a pitch indicating a predetermined time, or reach occurs. A scale indicating the timing of the heel to be played, or the timing of the heel to which the super reach effect is derived when the super reach effect is derived may be displayed. In addition, the reference line 474 and the end line 473 can be omitted.

  (L) In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display is configured to start with the start of the predetermined variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b and end with the end of the predetermined variation display. For example, it may be configured not to end at the stage of the end of the predetermined variation display but to end with the end of the subsequent predetermined variation display via a subsequent variation interval. In other words, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the decoration is displayed each time the variation display of the corresponding special display devices 43a and 43b is finished, even if the variation display of the plurality of decoration symbols from which the continuous notice effect is derived is performed. The design is such that the symbols are stopped and displayed. In contrast, a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the plurality of special display devices 43a and 43b are displayed over a variable display (a decorative pattern stop mode is displayed on the way (in the center as in the above embodiment)). Without being performed, and may be configured so as to be able to derive an effect that is also developed during the fluctuation interval.

  However, in the case of deriving the settlement effect, it is desirable that the decorative symbol variation display is started at the start of the predetermined variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and is terminated at the end of the predetermined variation display. Further, when the impression time display 471 is derived, with respect to the impression time display 471, the barometer display 472 is displayed with the end of each variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b without straddling the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b. It is desirable to configure it to be “0”. That is, the decorative display variation display (combination effect display) performed over the plurality of variation displays in the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed using a plurality of variation display times, so that the combined effect display is started. A plurality of variable displays are digested during the period from the end to the end. For this reason, a player who recognizes that the effect display and the variable display correspond one-to-one and eagerly recognizes the composite effect display, a plurality of variable displays are used after the composite effect display ends. As a result, there is a concern that a person may have a distrust such as whether the right to perform variable display has been lost without his knowledge.

  In this regard, by making the barometer display 472 of the impression time display 471 correspond to the variable display of each time of the special display devices 43a and 43b, each variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to the composite effect display is digested. You can teach how you are. Therefore, the above-mentioned concerns can be suppressed, and it can be recognized that an effect with a higher expectation is being executed as it spans a plurality of variable displays of the special display devices 43a and 43b.

  Further, for example, it is possible to recognize that the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b has been digested by visually recognizing the special display devices 43a and 43b. In a configuration in which a decorative symbol display device 42 is provided that may suggest the result of the lottery decision (prolong the teaching) in order to improve the performance rather than providing only the special display devices 43a and 43b to be performed. It is difficult to continue to visually recognize both the decorative symbol display device 42 and the special display devices 43a and 43b. In this regard, in the configuration in which the impression time display 471 is enjoyed together with the variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42, the decoration time is taught by using the impression time display 471 to digest the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b. It is possible to make it easier to recognize the digestion of the change display of the special display devices 43a and 43b to the extent that does not hinder the display of the change. Furthermore, it is possible to recognize that the change display of the special display devices 43a and 43b has been digested by visually recognizing the hold icon 461 in the hold display area 462. It is possible to improve the credibility that the change display of the display devices 43a and 43b has been digested (the idea that the change display and the corresponding hold icon 461 have disappeared due to some error or the like) Generation can be suppressed).

  (M) In the above embodiment, the big win state is generated only when the big win is won in the winning lottery performed when the game balls enter the start winning devices 33a and 33b. You may comprise so that a big hit state can be generated with the condition apparatus of. For example, a specific ball entry means having a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and an opening / closing means for opening and closing the specific area is provided, and a game ball entry (start winning prize) of the start winning devices 33a and 33b is provided. Based on the detection of the switches 224a and 224b, a lottery for opening the opening / closing means and a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a big hit state are performed, and a specific entry that allows a game ball to enter the specific area Means, non-specific entry means, specific entry detection means for detecting a game ball entering the specific entry means, and non-specific entry detection for detecting a game ball entered into the non-specific entry means When a game ball is detected by the specific entry detection means, a big hit state is given (and a prize ball is given), and a game ball is detected by the non-specific entry detection means (Prize ball is only given ,) The gaming machine configuration such jackpot state grant is not performed may be applied the configuration of the above embodiment. In addition, a distribution means that distributes game balls that have entered the specific area to specific entry means or non-specific entry means, or an entrance detection means that detects game balls that have entered the specific area on the upstream side of the distribution means. It is good also as providing. Furthermore, a plurality of suitable route detecting means are provided for detecting a game ball moving along the route provided on a route where the game balls entering the specific area can enter the specific entry means, and the preferred route detecting means When the detection is performed, the parameter display 472 of the impression time display 471 may be configured to increase (the parameter becomes “0” when entering the specific entry means or the non-specific entry means). In this case, it is possible to effectively utilize the impression time display 471 (a function for displaying) in a state where the winning / losing lottery is not performed.

  (N) A mode and a display position of the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 and an effect using the hold icon 461 (the content of the change information is grasped when the change information is held and stored, and the hold icon A corresponding pre-production (such as a suggestion of jackpot expectation) in the form of 461 can be appropriately set for each model. Further, in the above embodiment, the hold icon 461 is configured not to teach which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is a variable display based on the winning ball. The hold icon 461 may be configured to have information indicating whether the hold icon 461 corresponds to the first variation display or the second variation display, or may be configured in such a manner. Good.

  Further, in the above embodiment, proximity detection means (for example, a light emitting unit) that can detect the proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the decorative symbol display device 42 and is connected to the input / output port 554 of the sub-control device 262. In addition, a proximity detection sensor or a touch panel having a light receiving portion may be provided. For example, when the player brings a finger or the like close to the hold icon 461 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, the mode of the hold icon 461 is based on detection of the finger or the like. You may comprise so that it may change or move. In this case, interest in the hold icon 461 can be improved.

  (O) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 determines the timing of firing (launch interval) of the launching device 60, but is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and the launch control circuit 312 launches the launch. You may comprise so that timing (interval of discharge) may be measured. In this case, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main controller 261.

  (P) Although the number of variable winning devices 32 is one, two may be provided. Further, the arrangement and number of the first start winning device 33a, the second starting winning device 33b, the through gate 34, the variable winning device 32, and the like are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately arranged for each model. In addition, the second start winning device 33b may be configured such that a game ball can enter even in a closed state.

  (Q) In the above embodiment, data exchange (so-called mobile linked game) is performed between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a gaming machine manufacturer or the like via a communication portable terminal or the like owned by the player. You may comprise so that it can do. Further, when the mobile linked game is terminated, the two-dimensional code including the game information of this time is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code with the portable communication terminal, and the portable communication terminal In the configuration in which the game information is transmitted to the server by accessing the server, the pachinko machine 10 counts the number of occurrences of the variation display counter for counting the number of variations of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the number of occurrences of various jackpot states. A jackpot counter or the like may be provided, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile linked game may include information indicating various counter values. Furthermore, information on the total number of game balls fired, the type of effect that has been derived, the number of times, the number of times that the player has operated the effect button 125 during the button effect, etc. are included in the two-dimensional code. Also good. In this case, the gaming machine manufacturer can grasp the gaming situation.

  The counter value is erased by two-dimensional coding, and the other values are accumulated (even when the power is turned off) (they are erased when the power is turned on while operating the ram clear switch). It is good. Moreover, you may comprise so that a player can select from several types about the tendency of the behavior pattern of the pseudo feather | blade member 431 (with respect to the player who is performing a mobile interlocking game).

  (R) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 of various jackpot types are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. For example, the variable winning device 32 may perform the same operation as the “2RS” jackpot state, and set a jackpot to which the “normal mode” is given after the jackpot state ends. In the above embodiment, the “latency probability mode” is given after the end of the big hit state of “2RS”, but a “probability change mode” may be given instead.

  Note that the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured so that the instruction about winning the probability variation jackpot (15RS) with a ball is always given until the corresponding jackpot state ends at the latest. , Even if the corresponding jackpot state ends (even in the case of the probability variation mode internally), the decorative symbol display device 42 shifts to the same pull-back stage as the time reduction mode, and the special display device 43a in the time reduction mode. , 43b may be configured to shift to the probability changing stage when the upper limit number (100 times) of the time reduction mode is exceeded.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the winning probability in the winning lottery varies, but the winning probability does not change (is constant), and the period of the high pitched state (after the jackpot state is given) The above-described configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of variations are provided. Furthermore, in the winning lottery based on the winning to the second start winning device 33b, it may be configured so that “small hit” may be won, or “small hit” may be omitted.

  Also, the winning probability in the winning support lottery, the opening / closing pattern of the second start winning device 33b when winning, etc. can be set as appropriate for each model. For example, it is good also as setting the prize-winning upper limit of the game ball in one opening to the 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus 33b. More specifically, a start winning upper limit counter is provided for counting the number of game balls that enter the second start winning device 33b until the upper limit of the winning is reached, and when the second start winning device 33b is opened, the start is started. A value corresponding to the prize upper limit is set for the prize upper limit counter, and when the second start prize switch 224b is detected, the value of the start prize upper limit counter is decremented by 1, and the second start prize is received. Even when the timing for switching to the closed state has not yet arrived while the device 33b is in the open state, if the value of the start winning upper limit counter becomes “0”, the second start winning device 33b is immediately turned on. You may comprise so that it may be set as a closed state.

  (S) In the above embodiment, an impression time correspondence table for storing the correspondence between the length of the settlement effect (last impression effect) and the jackpot type is provided, and the settlement effect selected according to the jackpot type You may comprise so that the ratio of time may change. For example, as a jackpot type to which the probability variation mode is given, it is possible to select a jackpot of 15 rounds, a jackpot of 10 rounds, and a jackpot of 4 rounds. In the case of 5 seconds, there is a high possibility of winning 10 rounds, and in the case of 7 seconds, the possibility of winning 15 rounds may be increased. Furthermore, for example, when the time of the settlement effect exceeds a predetermined time, the possibility that it will be a probable big hit may be increased or may be determined. In these cases, the interest in the settlement effect can be increased, and the performance and game performance can be improved.

  In addition, an effect (eg, an effect of continuing to operate the effect button 125, a movable accessory that can be displaced between the retreat position and the functional position) that has been performed with the finalization effect on the decorative symbol display device 42 (display screen) May be configured to be derived (or for a while) after the result teaching effect (in the case of a favorable result for the player). . In this case, it is possible to diversify the effects when the result teaching results are taught the result of the lottery or the like (for example, occurrence of a big hit state), and the jackpot is made via a final effect (especially a long pattern). It is possible to give a stronger finish.

  (T) In the above-described embodiment, the suspended order is changed such that the second variation display that is suspended after the first variation display that is already suspended is digested before the first variation display. The second variation display is configured to be preferentially digested over the first variation display so as to move back and forth, but the first variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a, Regardless of whether the second variation display is based on the game ball entering the second start prize device 33b, the game ball enters the first start prize device 33a and the second start prize device 33b. In order, the corresponding variation display may be suspended, and the variation display previously suspended may be digested in order.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, it was based on the case where it wins by the big win in the winning / not-winning lottery performed based on the winning to the 1st starting winning device 33a, and the winning to the 2nd starting winning device 33b The jackpot type distribution ratio that can be given differs depending on whether or not the jackpot is won in the winning / losing lottery, but it may be configured to be the same. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the number of winning balls based on entering the first start winning device 33a is the same as the number of winning balls based on entering the second starting winning device 33b. May be larger than the other.

  Moreover, it is also possible to configure so that at least one of the first variation display and the second variation display cannot be stored on hold.

  (U) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 performs the normal process (see FIG. 10) after the main process (see FIG. 9). However, the present invention is particularly limited to such a structure. is not. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating of the counter value performed in steps S209 to S218 of normal processing in the above embodiment is performed. For example, in timer interrupt processing performed every 2 msec, The process performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal process in the embodiment and the process of step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt process in the above embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the processing of step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, A configuration in which a flag indicating the occurrence of occurrence of the error is turned on is given. Further, the processing in step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

  (V) In the above-described embodiment, at the start of the special symbol variation display, it is confirmed again whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, and the result of the confirmation processing (such as the success / failure flag etc. Whether or not to generate a big hit state according to the state), a variation display pattern, and the like may be determined.

  (W) A real-time clock capable of grasping the date and time may be provided, and an effect mode according to the date and time information of the real-time clock may be derived. Further, it may be configured such that a production that is easy to select changes depending on time and date (a table for a production that is easy to select changes). For example, a real-time clock is provided in the sub-control device 262 and a plurality of settlement time setting tables that are referred to when it is decided to lengthen the settlement effect are provided, and the time when the decision effect is lengthened is in the morning. If there is, the first settling time setting table is referred to, and if it is afternoon (until the evening), the second settling time setting table is set in which a longer time than the first settling time setting table is easily set. If the closing time of the game hall is approaching (for example, after 21 o'clock), the third settlement is easier to set than the first settlement time setting table or the first settlement time setting table. You may comprise so that a time setting table may be referred. A real-time clock is provided in the main controller 261, and a plurality of change time determination tables referred to when determining the change times of the special display devices 43a and 43b are provided, and it is relatively short at night (for example, after 21:00). You may comprise so that it may become easy to select the variation time determination table in which variation time is easy to set.

  (X) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a different type from the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, movable means that can be changed between a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an open state that allows entry into the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits entry into the specific area ( Variable entry means comprising wing members), specific entry means and non-specific entry means capable of entering a game ball entering a specific area, and detection of a game ball entering the specific entry means Specific entry detection means (condition establishment detection means) to be detected, special start means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and game balls entering the special start means are detected. A special start detection means for controlling and a main control means for performing opening / closing control of the variable pitching means, and when a game ball enters the specific area, the game ball is designated as the specific pitching means and the non-specific pitching means. Regardless of which ball is entered, a predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player. The main control means, based on the detection of the special start detection means, is a small hit state in which the variable pitching means is opened once or a plurality of times for the first time, or the variable pitching means is set to the first time. Whether or not to generate a jackpot state where a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the open state for a longer second time or a predetermined number of game balls enter the open variable winning means, and this is repeated a specified number of times. If you win a lottery in the winning lottery, you will generate a small win status, if you win a big hit in the lottery lottery, and if there is a detection of specific entry detection means You may apply to the gaming machine which generates a big hit state.

  (Y) In the above embodiment, when one of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is performing variable display, the other variable display is not performed (standby). Although it is configured, the variable display of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b may be executed simultaneously. In other words, if there is a hold for each of the first variation display and the second variation display, the corresponding variation display is executed (except during the hit state).

  In addition, for example, the decorative symbol display device 42 can derive a variable display (hereinafter referred to as a first effect display and a second effect display) using decorative symbols respectively corresponding to the first variation display and the second variation display. Configure. The first parameter display 472 of the first impression time display 471 suggesting the remaining time of the settlement effect of the first effect display, and the second parameter of the second impression time display 471 indicating the remaining time of the settlement effect of the second effect display The display 472 can be derived.

  In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to win in the second variation display than in the first variation display (the probability that the probability variation mode is given after the winning state is high, and the number of game balls that can be acquired in the winning state is For example, in the probability variation mode, a game is played in the hope that the second variation display is digested before the first variation display. That is, in the high pitching state, the possibility of winning in the second variation display increases as the time of the second effect display is shorter than the length of time of the settlement effect of the first effect display.

  For example, in a state in which both the first variation display and the second variation display are performed, the big hit expectation degree of either the first variation display or the second variation display is high (there is a pattern of hit confirmation. It may be possible to derive an effect indicating that it is possible to determine which one of the first effect display and the second effect display is supported, and further, the first variation display and the first Of the two variable displays, the display may be limited to the one that is changing, but it may be impossible to determine which of the variable displays, including the variable display that is on hold, has the highest expectation level. That is, when such an effect is derived, it is possible to add a game property such as watching the change display while expecting that the second parameter display 472 will disappear first. More specifically, in the normal mode, the play is successful, and the gameability that the player wants to support the second variation display (preferably either the first variation display or the second variation display is acceptable). In the case of the probability variation mode, the second variation display is performed at a high pitch and the second effect display is taught to be a big hit, but the first variation display is not performed as much as possible, and the result of the first effect display is taught. At the same time, it is possible to add a game such as wanting to be removed. Therefore, it is possible to excite the feeling that the second variation display of the first variation display and the second variation display is first digested, and to increase the interest in the first parameter display 472 and the second parameter display 472. Can do.

  Basically, in the parameter display 472, since the second parameter display 472 is less than the first parameter display 472, it is understood that the second variation display is digested first. Can suggest. Further, the first parameter display 472 is derived shorter than the remaining time of the actual finalization effect, and then the effect as if the first parameter display 472 has increased is derived, and the second variation display is digested first. It may be configured to be able to derive an effect such as. Alternatively, the second parameter display 472 is derived longer than the remaining time of the actual finalization effect, and then the effect as if the second parameter display 472 is reduced with the button effect, etc. You may comprise so that the production | presentation that a 2nd fluctuation display is digested first can be derived | led-out.

  In addition, for example, in the high pitched state, when the stop display of the first variation display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the first variation display during the variation is removed, the next variation of the first variation display is performed. The first parameter display 472 is increased according to time, or the variation information stored in the reserved storage area is read before the corresponding variation display is started (pre-read), and the first variation display is a big hit. You may comprise so that the 1st parameter display 472 may be increased in the range of the fluctuation time until it generate | occur | produces.

  In addition, for example, in a configuration in which the first effect display can be performed in the left region of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the second effect display can be performed in the right region, It may be configured such that the person who enters the settlement effect first derives the result first and ends the variable display (when the result of winning is derived, a corresponding winning state occurs). In this case, when starting the other effect display in the situation where one effect display is being performed among the first effect display and the second variation mode effect display, the other change display ends first. If the determination is made that the other settlement effect is started first and the result is negative, the start timing of the other settlement effect is shifted forward, or the start timing of the one settlement effect is shifted backward For example, the setting for aligning the bottom of the book is made.

  It should be noted that the final effect may be configured such that only one of the first effect display and the second effect display whose result is taught first is derived. In this case, it is possible to concentrate on the settlement effect, and it is possible to display the settlement effect in a larger area, thereby improving the performance.

  Further, in the configuration in which both the settlement effect of the first effect display and the settlement effect of the second effect display are not derived at the same time, the effect that the settlement effect corresponding to the first variation display is started (as a rare pattern). Is derived, the transition effect corresponding to the second variation display is derived and interrupted, and the switching effect is switched (from the settlement effect corresponding to the second variation display to the first variation display corresponding to the first variation display). (There is no pattern that shifts to). (Even if there is a slight difference between the start of the final effect of the first variable display and the end of the final effect of the second variable display) It may be configured to be connected smoothly, such as by extending the settlement effect of the second variable display (the settlement effect is easy to connect as described above), and once the pattern that the production fails is sandwiched, It may be configured as such to derive the over down). In addition, a suggestion that such a transfer effect may be performed is performed by the parameter display 472 (for example, the parameter display 472 that has disappeared blinks or the parameter display 472 that has become 0 is displayed up and down. It may be configured to show a state where it may increase as it undulates, or to add a parameter display 472 corresponding to a finalized effect to be connected).

  It should be noted that, in a configuration in which both the final effect of the first effect display and the final effect of the second effect display are not derived at the same time, a display that suggests the time until the final effect is started can be derived. May be. For example, a turn-back line may be provided corresponding to the parameter display 472 so that when the parameter display 472 reaches the turn-back line, the settlement effect is started.

  In addition, there are cases where the parameter display 472 is derived and cases where it is not derived (the effect display that does not derive the parameter display 472, which is determined by lottery, can be set not to be displayed by the player). It may be configured. Further, when one of the first variation display and the second variation display is fluctuating and one of them is stopped and displayed in a manner in which the jackpot is first taught, the other is forcibly (variation such as a lottery determination) It may be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the disengagement (regardless of the contents) (after the big hit state, the next variable display is started and the parameter display 472 is also changed to the corresponding manner), and is suspended. It may be configured to resume after the big hit state.

  (Z) Also, for example, a first variable winning device and a second variable winning device are provided as the variable winning device 32, and a specific winning opening is provided through which a game ball that has entered the second variable winning device can enter, In the second winning / losing lottery based on the winning to the second start winning device 33b, if the big win is not won, the small win is won, and if the big win is won, the second variable winning device is opened, Even when a game ball that has entered the second variable prize winning device enters the specific prize opening, a big hit state occurs in which the first variable prize winning device is opened (the second starting prize winning device 33b is easily opened). It is also possible to apply the present invention to a gaming machine in which a high hit state is more likely to win a jackpot than a low pitch state where there is no choice but to win a big hit in the first winning / losing lottery.

  Further, for example, a first variable prize winning device and a second variable prize winning device are provided as the variable prize winning device 32, and a specific prize winning opening through which a game ball that has entered the second variable winning prize winning device can enter is provided. When a game ball enters, a high probability state is given until the fluctuation state is digested a specified number of times after the jackpot state ends, and the jackpot state is a second variable winning device (opened in a predetermined round). There are normal types that are impossible to enter (substantially impossible because the opening time is too short) and advantageous types that can be entered into the second variable winning device. In the case of winning, the game can be applied to a gaming machine in which either the normal type or the advantageous type is assigned, and if the big win is won in the second winning / losing lottery, it is assigned to the advantageous type.

  When these configurations are employed, it becomes more prominent which of the first variation display and the second variation display is more advantageous. Furthermore, as shown in the above (x), by changing the first variation display and the second variation display at the same time, it is stronger which of the first variation display and the second variation display is stopped and displayed first. It can be interesting. In addition, by providing a display that suggests the remaining time of the variable display, it is possible to improve performance.

[Appendix]
The technical idea that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

  A. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, various effects are derived along with the variable display, and the degree of expectation that the special gaming state will occur (winning expectation) varies depending on what kind of effect is derived for the variable display. It has become.

  By the way, in recent years, there has been a tendency that the number of derivation of effects related to the winning expectation tends to increase. Forcibly connecting the effects in accordance with the variable display may cause a sense of incongruity in the effects performed during the variable display. The

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the production balance.

Means A-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Effect display means capable of deriving an effect display that starts with the start of the variable display of the special display means and ends with the end of the variable display of the special display means;
Sub-control means for controlling the effect display means based on information from the main control means,
The effect display of the effect display means is performed by interrupting the main effect and the main effect, or is performed (displayed) in parallel with the main effect at a time of the main effect, and is performed in parallel. There is a sub-effect that postpones the derivation of the specific effect in the main effect for a time corresponding to the
At least at the end of the main performance, the result of the success / failure lottery is taught or suggested,
In the main effect, the same movie is repeatedly derived (at a timing later than the timing at which the sub-effects can be derived), or the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined movie is It is configured to produce an impression presentation derived in slow motion,
A gaming machine, wherein the impression production time is set according to the time used in the sub production.

  According to the means A-1, the main effect (the timing at which the specific effect is derived) is shifted depending on whether the sub effect is derived or the length of time of the sub effect. By appropriately setting the impression time according to the time used in the sub-effect, the time of the entire effect display can be adjusted, and the start and end timing of the effect display can be performed using special display means. It can be surely synchronized with the fluctuation display. Furthermore, the impression effect is an effect in which the same moving image is derived repeatedly, or the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion. There is little discomfort, and control for lengthening can be performed relatively easily. Therefore, while making it possible to derive the sub-effect, the effect display of the effect display means can be made to proceed relatively smoothly while improving the performance, and the effect balance can be improved.

  In addition, when the sub effect is performed, the main effect is interrupted, or the derivation timing of the specific effect in the main effect is delayed, so the sub effect is a predetermined effect in the main effect. By covering with (specific production), it is possible to avoid a situation in which the predetermined production (specific production) is not derived in the main production. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which predetermined information (specific effect) in the main effect is skipped or difficult to recognize, and the effect display can be enjoyed more reliably.

  In addition, in “the effect that the same still image is continuously derived or the predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion”, a display in which the predetermined still image is zoomed in or stepped on at any time or step by step In other words, the image includes the same or almost the same display but also a display in which the color scheme changes (including whiteout and blackout). In other words, the impression effect is intended to have almost no change in the visual appearance from the start to the end.

  Further, “when the first time is set as the length of time for which the sub-effect is derived, the first corresponding time is set as the length of time for which the impression effect is derived, and the sub-effect is derived. When the second time shorter than the first time is set as the length of time to be performed, the second corresponding time shorter than the first corresponding time is set as the length of time for which the impression effect is derived When the second time longer than the first time is set as the length of time for the sub-effect to be derived, the length of time for the impression effect to be derived is greater than the first corresponding time. A short third response time may be set ".

  Means A-2. The gaming machine according to means A-1, wherein the impression effect is derived at a timing later than the sub-effect in the effect display.

  According to the means A-2, by performing the impression effect after the sub effect, when the time of the sub effect is long or short, it is possible to surely align the display time of the effect display in the impression effect.

  Means A-3. The gaming machine according to means A-2, wherein the impression effect is performed immediately before the result teaching effect that teaches or suggests the result of the lottery at the end of the main effect.

  Impression effect is an effect in which the same movie is repeatedly derived, the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined movie is derived in slow motion before teaching / suggesting the result of the lottery Derived in stages, it is ideal as an effect that boosts what the lottery results will be. Accordingly, by performing the impression effect immediately before the result teaching effect as in the means A-3, the last of the effect display can be boosted by the impression effect, and the impression effect time is slightly increased with the time change of the sub effect. Even if the length is shortened, a sense of incongruity with the impression production can be suppressed.

Means A-4. The time of the sub effect is a configuration that can be changed after the start of the effect display,
Means A-1 to A- characterized in that, when the time of the sub-effect is changed after the start of the variable display, the time of the impression time is changed according to the changed time of the sub-effect. 4. The gaming machine according to any one of 3.

  According to the means A-4, the reality of the effect display can be enhanced by the structure of generating the effect display (corresponding to the content) with the progress of the effect display. Further, even when the sub-effect time is determined after the start of the effect display, the end timing of the effect display can be changed by changing the length of the impression effect as in the means A-1. It can be matched with the end timing. In addition, since the control for making the impression effect longer and shorter is relatively easy, even in a situation where there is not much time delay, it is possible to accurately adjust the time for the effect display with a relatively large margin.

  Means A-5. An effect pattern of the effect display is determined at the start of the effect display, the time of the impression effect is determined according to the effect pattern, and the time of the sub effect is determined according to the time of the impression effect A gaming machine according to Means A-4, characterized in that:

  According to the means A-5, when an effect pattern that can be expected to occur in the special gaming state is selected, when it is desired to set a longer impression effect time to excite the effect display, the impression effect is started at the start of the effect display. By setting a longer time, the time of the sub-effect is set relatively short, and even if it is determined that the sub-effect time will be the longest after the start of the effect display, the impression effect time will be secured to a certain extent. can do.

  Means A-6. The gaming machine according to means A-4 or A-5, wherein a time other than the impression effect in the main effect is not changed after the start of the effect display.

  According to the means A-6, the effect of the means A-1 such as avoiding that the sub-effect is affected by the specific effect of the main effect is more reliably achieved.

Means A-7. Provided by the player operating so that the player can operate, and when the operation is performed in the operation enabled state, a display corresponding to the display in the effect display unit is derived,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-6, wherein the sub-effect includes an operation effect in which an operation effective period in which the operation is enabled is set.

  According to the means A-7, since the operation effect is derived at the time of the sub effect, the player's interest in the sub effect can be increased. In addition, since the time of the sub-effect changes depending on the timing of operation of the effect operation means during the operation valid period (there may not be operated), in that case, the impression effect time is adjusted as in the above-described means A-1. By doing so, it is possible to derive the effect display smoothly and so that the change display matches the end timing.

  Means A-8. Unit A-7 is characterized in that when the time of the sub-effect is set to be equal to or longer than a predetermined time, the start of the operation effective period is delayed from the start of the operation effect. Game machines.

  According to the means A-8, when the impression effect time is desired to be shortened, if the impression effect time is set to be short at the start of the effect display, the operation effect time will be set correspondingly longer. Suppressing the situation where the operation effect is ended early and the impression effect time is lengthened by the operation of the effect operation means immediately after the start of the operation effect. can do.

Means A-9. In the operation effect, an operation effect result display that teaches the result of the operation effect is derived based on the operation of the effect operation means,
A plurality of operation methods of the effect operation means that are triggered by the operation effect result display are prepared,
The gaming machine according to means A-8, wherein an operation method of the effect operation means to be selected is limited according to a length of time from the start of the operation effective period to the start of the operation effect. .

  According to the means A-9, if the operation method of the effect operation means is different, there is a difference in the time until the operation effect result display is derived. For this reason, according to the time of the sub-production, the operation method of the production operation means is set flexibly according to the time of the sub-production. The production can be executed reliably.

  If there is a gap, long press, repeated hits (the maximum number of times is high, the time limit until the end is long), and a timing tap that allows the operation to be performed in accordance with the timing instructed on the gaming machine side (long period) ) Is selected, and if it is desired to shorten the time as much as possible, an operation with a limited number of times, or a timing tap (short period) may be selected.

  Means A-10. In the impression effect (the last impression effect), a predetermined time elapses after the operation effective period starts, or the effect operation means is operated a predetermined number of times or more in the operation effective period, or the operation Means A- is characterized in that the operation effect in which the operation effect result display as the result teaching effect is derived is included by maintaining the effect operation means at the operation position for a predetermined time or more in the effective period. 9. The gaming machine according to 9.

  According to the means A-10, it is possible to improve the performance of the impression effect (last impression effect).

Means A-11. As a result of teaching or suggesting the result of the lottery at the end of the main effect, the last impression effect, which is the impression effect performed immediately before the teaching effect, is associated with a winning expectation degree that is an expectation degree for the occurrence of the special gaming state. And
Means A comprising an impression time display means capable of deriving an impression time display that teaches or suggests a length of time from when the last impression effect is derived to when the result teaching effect is derived. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to A-10.

  According to the means A-11, referring to the impression time display shown by the impression time display means, the effect display is watched while predicting what kind of last impression effect may be derived in the future. Such a game can be given. In other words, since the last impression effect is associated with the winning expectation level, for example, if it is suggested that the last impression effect with a relatively long time is performed in the impression time display, it is expected to generate a special gaming state. You can make predictions such as Therefore, it is possible to perform more various and complicated effects.

  B. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, various effects are derived along with the variable display, and the degree of expectation that the special gaming state will occur (winning expectation) varies depending on what kind of effect is derived for the variable display. It has become.

  By the way, in recent years, there has been a tendency that the number of derivation of effects related to the winning expectation tends to increase. Forcibly connecting the effects in accordance with the variable display may cause a sense of incongruity in the effects performed during the variable display. The

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the production balance.

Means B-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Effect display means capable of deriving an effect display that starts with the start of the variable display of the special display means and ends with the end of the variable display of the special display means;
Sub-control means for controlling the effect display means based on information from the main control means,
The effect display of the effect display means is performed by interrupting the main effect and the main effect, or is performed (displayed) in parallel with the main effect at a time of the main effect, and is performed in parallel. There is a sub-effect that postpones the derivation of the specific effect in the main effect for a time corresponding to the
In the main effect, a result teaching effect that teaches or suggests the result of the lottery at the end of the main effect, and a last impression effect that is performed immediately before the result teaching effect,
A gaming machine, wherein a time of the sub-effect is set according to a time used in the last impression effect.

  The last impression effect, which is performed immediately before the result teaching effect display, is the last exciting scene of the effect display, and in situations where it can be expected that a special gaming state will occur, the last impression effect can be made flashy or a stronger impression It is conceivable that the last impression production time is set to be relatively long.

  In this respect, according to the means B-1, the sub-effect time is set according to the time used in the last impression effect. For example, the time used in the last impression effect is increased. When it is desired, the time for the last impression effect can be ensured by shortening the sub effect without increasing the time for the entire effect display. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily adjust the display time of the effect display, and even if the time of the last impression effect varies (even if it is not fixed), the start and end timings of the effect display are special. It is possible to reliably synchronize with the variable display performed by the display means.

  In addition, the adjustment corresponding to the length of time of the last impression effect is performed not in the main effect but in the sub effect, and when the sub effect is being performed, the main effect is interrupted or a specific effect in the main effect Since the derivation timing is delayed, the sub-effect is covered with the predetermined effect (specific effect) in the main effect, so that the predetermined effect (specific effect) is derived in the main effect. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is lost (or shortened). Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which predetermined information (specific effect) in the main effect is skipped or difficult to recognize, and the effect display can be enjoyed more reliably.

  In addition, “the sub effect time setting table used for setting the time of the sub effect is set to a time longer than the case where the first sub effect time setting table and the first sub effect time setting table are referred to. Or a second sub-effect production time setting table that is highly likely to be set, and comprises an impression time discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the time for which the last impression production is derived is long. When the impression time discriminating means determines that the last impression effect time is long after the impression effect time is set, the first sub effect time setting table is referred to when setting the sub effect time. When the impression time determination means determines that the last impression effect time is short, the second sub effect time setting table is used when setting the sub effect time. It is also possible "that is referenced. In this case, if the last impression production time is long, the sub production time is shortened, and if the last impression production time is short, the sub production time is lengthened. it can. Therefore, the effect of means B-1 is more reliably exhibited.

  Further, “when the first time is set as the length of time for which the last impression effect is derived, the first corresponding time is set as the length of time for which the sub-effect is derived, and the last impression effect is set. When the second time shorter than the first time is set as the length of time from which the sub-effect is derived, the second corresponding time shorter than the first corresponding time as the length of time from which the sub-effect is derived Is set, and when the second time longer than the first time is set as the length of time for which the last impression effect is derived, the first correspondence is set as the length of time for which the sub-effect is derived. The third corresponding time shorter than the time may be set ".

  Means B-2. The sub-effect is an effect including an effect in which the same moving image is repeatedly derived, the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion. A gaming machine according to -1.

  According to the means B-2, there is little discomfort even if the derivation period is lengthened or shortened, and control for lengthening the length can be relatively easily performed. Therefore, while making it possible to derive the sub-effect, the effect display of the effect display means can be made to proceed relatively smoothly while improving the performance, and the effect balance can be improved.

Means B-3. In the main effect, a plurality of effect patterns having different winning expectations, which are expectations for the occurrence of the special gaming state, are prepared.
The impression effect time setting table used for setting the last impression effect time is provided separately from the impression effect pattern setting table used for setting the last impression effect pattern. A gaming machine according to -1 or B-2.

  According to the means B-3, the last impression presentation effect pattern and the derived time are stored as a set (the impression presentation time setting table and the impression presentation pattern setting table are combined into one, (Such as 5 seconds for pattern A, 6 seconds for pattern A, 7 seconds for pattern A, 5 seconds for pattern B, 6 seconds for pattern B, 7 seconds for pattern B, etc.) And data capacity can be reduced. In particular, in a configuration in which the last impression effect time can be changed after the start of fluctuation, such an effect is more remarkably exhibited.

Means B-4. In the impression effect time setting table, the first impression effect time setting table and the first impression effect time setting table are set longer or more likely to be set than when the first impression effect time setting table is referred to. 2 impression production time setting table is provided,
In the main effect, the first effect determination means for determining whether or not the winning expectation of the effect pattern performed until the last impression effect is high (first),
When it is determined by the expectation degree determination means that the winning expectation degree of the effect pattern performed until the last impression effect is high, the second impression effect time setting table is referred to when setting the time of the last impression effect. The gaming machine according to means B-3, characterized in that:

  According to the means B-4, in the effect display, when an effect pattern with a high degree of winning expectation is derived before the last impression effect, regardless of the effect pattern of the last impression effect (expectation of the last impression effect effect pattern) Although the degree is low), the last impression time is set relatively long. For this reason, the feelings raised in the scene before the last scene can be digested by firmly hitting the last impression production of the relatively long last scene (the feeling of ending up with a simple end to the climax) Can avoid indigestion). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by improving the balance between the effect display and the expected expectation. In addition, since the expectation level is changed by changing the time, rather than changing the last impression production pattern, it avoids a uniform combination of production patterns and changes the production pattern. It is possible to suppress complication of control due to.

Means B-5. In the impression effect time setting table, the first impression effect time setting table and the first impression effect time setting table are set longer or more likely to be set than when the first impression effect time setting table is referred to. 2 impression production time setting table is provided,
In the main effect, first expectation level determination means for determining whether or not the winning expectation level of the effect pattern performed until the last impression effect is high;
Second expectation level determining means for determining whether or not the winning expectation level of the last impression effect production pattern is high,
In the case where it is determined by the first expectation level determination means that the winning expectation level of the effect pattern performed before the last impression effect is not high (determined as low), the second expectation level determination means When it is determined that the winning expectation degree of the last impression effect production pattern is high, the first impression effect time setting table is referred to when setting the last impression effect time. -3 or B-4.

  According to the means B-5, in the effect display, if the winning expectation level is not increased by the last impression effect, the last impression effect is obtained even though the effect pattern having a high winning expectation level is derived in the last impression effect. A relatively short last impression effect is derived without being lengthened. Accordingly, it is possible to refrain from derivation of a long pattern last impression effect in a situation where the player feels that the last impression effect is excessive (unnecessarily long). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by improving the balance between the effect display and the expected expectation.

Means B-6. The time of the sub effect is a configuration that can be changed after the start of the effect display,
If the time of the sub-effect is changed after the start of the variable display, the last impression effect time is reset according to the changed time of the sub-effect. Thru | or the game machine in any one of B-5.

  According to the means B-6, the reality of the effect display can be enhanced by the configuration in which the effect display is generated (corresponding to the content) with the progress of the effect display.

  Moreover, even if the sub-effect pattern is set in accordance with the time of the last impression effect as in the above-described means B-1, if the time of the sub-effect is changed after the effect display is started, There is a concern that the length may vary, and the end timing of the effect display and the end timing of the variation display of the identification information may be shifted. In this regard, like this means B-3, the length of the impression effect is changed according to the time used in the sub effect, so that the time of the sub effect is determined after the start of the effect display. In addition, the end timing of the effect display can be matched with the end timing of the variable display.

  Furthermore, the time shift of the effect display that occurred during the sub-effect is absorbed in the last impression effect that is the final stage of the effect display, and the effect for adjusting the shift caused by the sub-effect is in the middle of the effect display. In addition, it is possible to make adjustments at one location of the last impression effect even if the sub effect is performed a plurality of times. Therefore, for example, a situation in which an effect in which time adjustment is performed is derived in the middle of the effect display or is derived many times, so that the player is distracted and cannot concentrate on the subsequent development. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the production display from becoming too tedious or causing control to become complicated (wasted) due to multiple (excessive) productions for adjusting the deviation caused by the sub production. can do.

  It should be noted that, as in the above-mentioned means B-1, the sub-production time is roughly adjusted to the last impression production time in advance (so as to be within the production display time), so that the impression is made according to the time of the sub-production. The amount of change (adjustment range) from the preset time of the impression time when adjusting the time of the time can be reduced. Therefore, the last impression effect can be performed within a preferable range of time length.

Means B-7. Provided by the player operating so that the player can operate, and when the operation is performed in the operation enabled state, a display corresponding to the display in the effect display unit is derived,
In the last impression effect, a predetermined time elapses after the operation effective period in which the operation is enabled is started, or the effect operation means is operated a predetermined number of times in the operation effective period, or Means B- is characterized in that an operation effect in which the operation effect result display as the result teaching effect is derived is included by maintaining the effect operation means at the operation position for a predetermined time or more in the operation effective period. 6. The gaming machine according to 6.

  According to the means B-7, it is possible to improve the performance of the last impression effect.

  Means B-8. The last impression effect is an effect in which the same moving image is repeatedly derived, the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion. Or the gaming machine according to B-7.

  According to the means B-8, the last impression effect is an effect in which the same moving image is repeatedly derived, the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion. Deriving the results of the lottery before teaching and suggesting it is ideal as an effect to boost what happens to the results of the lottery, and there is little discomfort even if the derivation period is shortened, and it is relatively easy to control the lengthening It can be carried out. Therefore, while making it possible to derive the sub-effect, the effect display of the effect display means can be made to proceed relatively smoothly while improving the performance, and the effect balance can be improved.

  In particular, even if it is necessary to change the time of the last impression production in a situation where there is not much time delay by changing the time of the sub production after the start of fluctuation, the time of the last impression production with a relatively margin Can be changed, and it is possible to accurately align the time of the effect display.

Means B-9. The last impression effect is associated with a winning expectation that is an expectation for occurrence of the special gaming state with a predetermined variation display,
Any of means B-1 to B-8 further comprising an impression time display means capable of deriving an impression time display that teaches or suggests a length of time for which the last impression effect is derived. Game machines.

  According to the means B-9, referring to the impression time display shown by the impression time display means, watching the effect display while predicting what kind of last impression effect may be derived in the future. Such a game can be given. In other words, since the last impression effect is associated with the winning expectation level, for example, if it is suggested that the last impression effect with a relatively long time is performed in the impression time display, it is expected to generate a special gaming state. You can make predictions such as Therefore, it is possible to perform more various and complicated effects.

Means B-10. Producing means controlled by the sub-control means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-9, wherein an effect effect by the effect means can be randomly generated during the sub-effect.

  According to the means B-10, it is possible to make the sub production more exciting and to make it difficult to understand that the time of the sub production has been shortened due to the adjustment related to the impression production. Note that the timing, number of times, length, number of patterns, and the like of the effect production are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model.

Means B-11. The effect means includes a movable accessory that is displaceable between a functional position located in front of the effect display means (on the display unit) and a retreat position deviating from the front (in the display part) of the effect display means. ,
The gaming machine according to means B-10, wherein in the effect effect, the movable accessory can be set to the functional position.

  According to the means B-11, the operation effect of the means 10 is more reliably achieved.

Means B-12. Producing means controlled by the sub-control means,
In the last impression presentation, means B-1 to B-11 are characterized in that the effect presentation by the presentation means is only a pattern derived from the beginning to the end of the last impression presentation and a pattern not derived at all. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the means B-12, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to determine whether the last impression effect is a long pattern or a short pattern due to the effect effect.

  C. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, various effects are derived along with the variable display, and the degree of expectation that the special gaming state will occur (winning expectation) varies depending on what kind of effect is derived for the variable display. It has become.

  By the way, there is a constant demand for novelty and diversification of effects performed with variable display.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving performance.

Means C-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Effect display means capable of deriving an effect display that starts with the start of the variable display of the special display means and ends with the end of the variable display of the special display means;
Sub-control means for controlling the effect display means based on information from the main control means,
In the effect display, a result teaching effect that teaches or suggests the result of the lottery at the end of the effect display, and a last impression effect that is performed immediately before the result teaching effect,
The length of time of the last impression effect is associated with a winning expectation that is an expectation for occurrence of the special gaming state with a predetermined variation display,
An gaming machine comprising: an impression time display means capable of deriving an impression time display that teaches or suggests a length of time from which the last impression effect is derived.

  According to the means C-1, with reference to the impression time display shown by the impression time display means, the game performance of watching the effect display while predicting what kind of last impression effect will be derived in the future. Can be granted. In other words, since the last impression effect is associated with the winning expectation level, for example, if it is suggested that the last impression effect with a relatively long time is performed in the impression time display, it is expected to generate a special gaming state. You can make predictions such as Therefore, it is possible to perform more various and complicated effects.

  In addition, it is possible to grasp that the “last impression presentation” is at least immediately before the final result is obtained, and display effects that are likely to affect the final result after that (other than the length of the last impression presentation time) It is intended to be a display performance that is not derived from (almost), for example, at least the scene after the dice is thrown, and when a description such as slow motion is inserted at the end of the display of the dice thrown state, A scene with only such a slow motion part is intended. Other last impression effects include, for example, after a spear has been released by a spear throw (just before the spear stabs the ground if the last slow motion is applied), and after a definitive punch in boxing has been delivered (the last If slow motion is entered, after the punch hits the opponent, just before receiving a passing nomination in the audition (if the last slow motion is entered, the name is simply read out, and it is whitened out from the dark state. , Voice is not derived), immediately after raising the prey from fishing, the result cannot be confirmed well by spraying, the result of winning / failing lottery by stopping and displaying in a predetermined combination on the production display means For example, there is a state in which the decorative pattern that teaches or suggests is in slow motion immediately before it is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display.

Means C-2. The effect display means is configured to be capable of deriving a specific effect that increases the expected expectation in the effect display,
If the specific effect is derived in the effect display, the impression time display mode is longer than the current mode in accordance with the winning expectation level corresponding to the specific effect. The gaming machine according to means C-1, wherein the gaming machine is changed to a mode indicating the above.

  According to the means C-2, the impression time display whose aspect changes with the progress of the variable display (specific effect) can be made more interesting, and the impression time display and the effect display (winning expectation degree) can be made more interesting. It is possible to derive an intricate production.

  “The effect display means is configured to be able to derive a specific effect for increasing or decreasing the winning expectation level in the effect display, and a specific effect for increasing the winning expectation level is derived in the effect display. The impression time display mode is changed to a mode indicating that the last impression time is longer than the current mode, and a specific effect that lowers the winning expectation in the effect display is derived. In such a case, the aspect of the impression time display may be configured to be changed to an aspect indicating that the last impression presentation time is shorter than the current aspect.

Means C-3. The effect display is performed by interrupting the main effect and the main effect, or is performed (displayed) in parallel with the main effect at a time of the main effect, and corresponds to a period of time performed in parallel. There is a sub-effect that postpones the derivation of the specific effect in the main effect for a period of time,
The last impression effect and the result teaching effect are performed in the main effect,
When the first time is set as the length of time for which the sub-effect is derived, the first corresponding time is set as the length of time for which the last impression effect is derived,
When the second time shorter than the first time is set as the length of time for the sub-effect to be derived, the length of time to derive the last impression effect is shorter than the first corresponding time. Second response time is set,
When a second time longer than the first time is set as the length of time for the sub-effect to be derived, the length of time to derive the last impression effect is shorter than the first corresponding time. The gaming machine according to means C-1 or C-2, wherein a third corresponding time is set.

  According to the means C-3, by diversifying the last impression production time, it is possible to diversify the way of displaying the impression time display.

Means C-4. The time of the sub effect is a configuration that can be changed after the start of the change display (the effect display),
The means C-3 for changing the last impression time according to the changed time of the sub-effect when the time of the sub-effect is changed after the start of the variable display. Game machines.

  According to the means C-4, the reality of the effect display can be enhanced by the structure of generating the effect display (corresponding to the content) with the progress of the effect display. Even if the sub-effect time is determined after the start of the effect display, the end timing of the effect display can be changed and changed by changing (resetting) the length of the last impression effect accordingly. Can be matched with the end timing of.

Means C-5. In the sub effect time setting table used for setting the time of the sub effect, a time longer than the case where the first sub effect time setting table and the first sub effect time setting table are referred to is set. Alternatively, a second sub production time setting table that is highly likely to be set is provided,
Impression time determination means for determining whether or not the last impression production time is long,
After the last impression effect time is set, when the impression time determination unit determines that the last impression effect time is long, the first sub effect is set when setting the time (pattern) of the sub effect. The time setting table is referenced,
When the impression time determination unit determines that the time of the last impression effect is short, the second sub effect time setting table is referred to when setting the time (pattern) of the sub effect. A gaming machine according to means C-4.

  According to the means C-5, the time of the sub impression is roughly adjusted to the time of the last impression presentation beforehand (so as to be within the time of the presentation display). The amount of change (adjustment width) of the impression time when adjusting the time from the preset time can be reduced. Therefore, after the start of the variable display, even if the time of the last impression effect is changed with the change of the time of the sub effect, the last impression effect can be performed within a suitable time length range. it can. Further, since the time length of the last impression effect can be set within a suitable range, the last impression effect (length) and the winning expectation are associated with each other as in the means C-1. It becomes possible.

Means C-6. Provided by the player operating so that the player can operate, and when the operation is performed during the operation effective period, the display device for the display corresponding to the display of the display is derived.
It is configured to be able to derive an operation effect as the sub-effect in which the operation effective period is set,
In the operation effect, the operation operation period is an acceptance display period in which an acceptance display prompting an operation to the effect operation unit is derived, and the operation operation unit is outside the operation effective period and is in the reception period. Result display period from which the display corresponding to the operation of is derived,
When the operation of the effect operation means is performed during the reception display period, the time of the entire operation effect is shorter than when the operation of the effect operation means is not performed during the reception display period. A gaming machine according to any one of the means C-3 to C-5.

  According to the means C-6, since the length of the entire operation effect is shortened by operating the effect operation means in the operation effect, the time of the last impression effect can be relatively increased.

  Means C-7. The last impression effect is an effect in which the same moving image is repeatedly derived, the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion. Thru | or the game machine in any one of C-6.

  According to the means C-7, the last impression effect is an effect that the same moving image is repeatedly derived, the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion, The lottery result is derived in the previous stage of teaching / suggesting, and it is ideal as an effect that enhances what happens to the lottery result.

  Further, as in the above-mentioned means C-3, even if the derivation period of the last impression effect is shortened according to the time used in the sub-effect, the sense of incongruity is small, and the control for lengthening it can be performed relatively easily. . Therefore, while making it possible to derive the sub-effect, the effect display of the effect display means can be made to proceed relatively smoothly while improving the performance, and the effect balance can be improved.

  In particular, as in the above-mentioned means C-4, even if it is necessary to change the time of the last impression effect in a situation where there is not much time delay, such as when the time of the sub effect is changed after the start of the specific effect, etc. The last impression production time can be changed incidentally with a relatively large margin, and the production display time can be accurately adjusted.

  Means C-8. The impression time display is configured to be derived before and after the start of the last impression effect, and when derived after the start of the last impression effect, with the end of the last impression effect, The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-7, characterized in that the remaining time of the last impression effect is set to be an aspect.

  According to the means C-8, the impression time display indicates the time of the last impression effect before the last impression effect, and indicates the remaining time of the last impression effect after the start of the last impression effect. The impression time display can be used more effectively, and the performance can be improved.

  Means C-9. When the impression time display corresponding to a predetermined variation display is derived, the impression time display is at least from the start of the predetermined variation display to the end of the last impression effect of the predetermined variation display. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-8, wherein the gaming machine is derived.

  According to the means C-9, the feature that the impression time display changes with time can be taken up more greatly, and the impression time display can be made more interesting. In addition, the impression time display and the effect that contributes to the winning expectation degree correspond to each other, which makes it easy to grasp which effect should be expected. Therefore, for a player who is new to the gaming machine, the impression time display can be used as a guide as to what value the impression time display has, and the game can be easily adapted to the game quickly.

Means C-10. Provided by the player operating so that the player can operate, and when the operation is performed during the operation effective period, the display device for the display corresponding to the display of the display is derived.
The operation impression in which the operation effective period is set in the last impression effect is configured to be derived,
When the operation operation means is operated in the operation effect derived to the last impression effect, a specific effect associated with the winning expectation degree is derived, and the impression time display is the last impression effect. The game machine according to means C-8 or C-9, characterized in that the derivation time is changed to a mode in which the derivation time is shortened.

  According to the means C-10, the last impression effect can be raised and the interest can be improved. Also, by deriving an effect that changes the impression time display before the last impression effect, there is a discrepancy between the last impression effect time and the impression time display at the start of the last impression effect. Even if it has been, it becomes possible to derive the restoration of the deviation as the production by using the operation production during the last impression production, and to eliminate the deviation without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a sense of incongruity or a reduction in performance is caused as in the case where the shift is forcibly corrected before the start of the last impression effect.

  The production operation means includes an operation part that can be displaced between an operation position and a non-operation position, an operation detection means that can detect the operation part displaced to the operation position, and a non-operation part. An urging means for urging the operation position side, wherein the effect operation means is in a first state in which the operation portion is in the first position, and the operation portion is different from the first position (from the first position). Also, a switching means for changing the state to the second state at the second position (which largely protrudes from the attached portion to which the effect operation means is attached) may be provided. Moreover, you may comprise so that the suggestion of an expectation degree can be performed with the aspect of the production operation means in an operation production. For example, the protrusion length can be adjusted stepwise or steplessly (for example, using a rack and pinion and a stepping motor), and the amount of protrusion varies depending on the impression time display mode ( The protrusion amount may be larger as the remaining time is longer. In this case, the interest in the impression time display can be further increased. In addition, the effect display means can displace the operation section between the operation position and the non-operation position regardless of whether the operation display section is in the first position or the second position (the operation section displaced to the operation position is detected by the operation detection means). It may be configured as above. Further, in the impression effect, a long press effect or a continuous hit effect of the operation unit may be performed.

  Means C-11. In the state where the impression time display means displays the remaining impression impression time, a pseudo end effect (pseudo last impression effect and pseudo result teaching effect) that causes the effect display to end is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-8 to C-10, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be derivable.

  According to the means C-11, it seems as if the effect display corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation display has ended, but when the impression time display means is confirmed, it does not seem that the predetermined fluctuation display ends, With regard to the display, you can look forward to the development that the production display still continues with a sense of security that will not continue, such as it will continue further. Therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to feel a sense of superiority, and to improve interests.

Means C-12. A state between a first visual state that is invisible or difficult to visually recognize from the player, a second visual state that is visible from the player, and a third visual state in which the visual range is limited more than the second visual state. With movable movable parts,
In the last impression production, the movable accessory is configured to be able to derive a movable accessory presentation in which the state changes to the third visual state,
With the start of the last impression effect, the movable accessory changes its state from the first viewing state to the third viewing state, and the result teaching effect that teaches or suggests that it has been won in the winning lottery is derived. When the result teaching effect is derived, the movable accessory changes state to the second visual recognition state,
In the case where the result teaching effect that teaches or suggests that the winning is determined in the winning / losing lottery is derived, the movable accessory is between the timing at which the result teaching effect is derived and the timing at which the effect display ends. The game machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-11, wherein the state changes to the first visual recognition state.

  According to the means C-12, even if the aspect of the last impression effect becomes relatively monotonous, the last impression effect can be greatly increased by involving the movable accessory effect. As a result, the interest in the impression time display can be further increased, and the interest can be improved. In addition, you may comprise so that the suggestion to derive a movable accessory effect can be performed with the aspect of impression time display.

  Means C-13. The impression time display is configured so as to sequentially change from an aspect indicating that the remaining period is large to an aspect indicating that there is no remaining period as the effect display progresses. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to C-12.

  According to the means C-13, it is possible to infer how long the last impression time will be from the temporal change of the impression time display, or to estimate the winning expectation, Can fully enjoy. Further, as in the above-described means C-3, when the last impression effect time is long, the sub effect time is shortened, and when the last impression effect time is short, the sub effect time is lengthened. If the impression time display is reduced by a certain amount over time, the impression time display (time suggested by) will be shortened if the last impression production time is short, and the last impression production time will be shortened. If it is long, the impression time display becomes long. Therefore, the impression time display can be controlled relatively easily.

Means C-14. A plurality of types are prepared for the special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to means C-1 or C-13, wherein an impression time correspondence table is provided for storing a correspondence relationship between a length of time of the last impression effect and a type of the special gaming state. .

  According to the means C-14, the type of the special game state can be estimated based on the length of time of the last impression effect. Therefore, the interest in the last impression effect can be increased, and the performance and game performance can be improved.

  Means C-15. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-14, wherein the display position of the impression time display can be changed by an operation by a player's operation means.

  According to the means C-15, since the player can display the impression time display at a favorite position, the comfort of the game can be improved. The impression time display size may be changed. In addition, the impression time display may be divided into a plurality of (locations) and can be displayed. Further, the position of the movable accessory that can appear and appear in front of the effect display means may be adjustable, and the position of the impression time display and the like may be automatically changed according to the position of the movable accessory. .

  Means C-16. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-15, wherein the setting is made so that the impression time display is not displayed.

  According to the means C-16, when it is confirmed that the variation display is likely to be expected based on the impression time display mode, it is ensured that an effect display with a certain degree of content is derived. Thus, it is possible to select a way of enjoying such that the impression time display is not displayed and the pounding feeling is increased. In particular, it is desirable that the impression time display can be easily hidden even during the variable display. As an example, for example, pressing the button twice in succession, pressing the bottom of the cross key, the proximity time detection means (sensor, touch panel, etc.) capable of detecting the object located in front of the impression time display means, impression time display Moving the hand so that it can be detected that the object located in front of is quickly moved to the side (flicked).

  Means C-17. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-16, wherein a player can set a display mode relating to the motif of the impression time display.

  According to the means C-17, the player can set the display mode related to the motif of the impression time display that will be displayed for a relatively long time when playing the game to his / her preference, so that the player progresses the game more happily. can do.

  “Impression time display display mode can be set” means that the impression time display motif can be changed, the color can be changed, and the like. For example, the impression time display shape may be changed from a square to a circle, or the impression time display motif may be changed from “dog” to “cat”. Further, it may be configured such that how to reduce the remaining time, how to increase the degree of expectation, and the like differ depending on the shape of the impression time display. Furthermore, the impression time display setting may be performed by the player operating the operating means provided in the gaming machine, or exchanging information between the gaming machine and the server via the portable communication terminal. In the process of performing a mobile linked game, it is performed by operating a mobile communication terminal or a personal computer on the web page of the server (the setting information is included in the password issued by the server, and the password is input to the gaming machine) Thus, the setting information may be reflected).

  Means C-18. 18. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-17, wherein a player can set a derivation ratio of the expectation-up effect pattern.

  According to the means C-18, the interest in the impression time display can be further increased. If the previous player's settings remain, the expectation-up effect rules are different, so the next player may be confused. It may be configured so that the setting of the derivation ratio of the pattern of the expectation increase effect (setting related to the impression time display) and the like can be performed only when there is an event.

Means C-19. A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching device is guided; and
First starting entrance means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and second starting entrance means,
First starting entrance detecting means capable of detecting a game ball entering the first starting entrance means;
Second starting entrance detecting means capable of detecting a game ball entering the second starting entrance means;
Variable ball entry means (first variable ball entry means and second variable entry means configured to be able to change the state between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter) Variable pitching means),
Whether or not to generate a special game state (first special game state) that opens the variable ball entry means (first variable ball entry means) when the first start ball entry detection means performs detection. A first special game generating means as the main control means for generating the special gaming state (first special gaming state) when the first winning / losing lottery is performed,
A first special symbol display means as the special display means for performing a first variation display by a first special symbol that teaches the result of the first winning / losing lottery;
When the detection by the second starting entrance detection means is performed (the first winning / losing lottery), the special game state (the second variable entrance means) that opens the variable entrance means (second variable entrance means) 2 A special winning state (so-called “small hit”) is performed to determine whether or not to generate a second winning / notifying lottery, and when the second winning / notifying lottery is won, the special gaming state (the second special gaming state) is generated. Second special game generating means as the main control means;
A second special symbol display means as the special display means for performing a second variation display by a second special symbol that teaches the result of the second winning / losing lottery,
A specific entrance portion into which a game ball entering the second variable entrance means can enter;
Specific entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball entered in the specific entry part;
An accessory special game state generating means for generating the first special game state when detection by the specific entrance detection means is performed),
The first variation display in the first special symbol display means and the second variation display in the second special symbol display means can be executed in parallel,
The effect display means is configured to be able to derive a first effect display corresponding to the first variation display and a second effect display corresponding to the second variation display,
As the impression time display means, a first impression time display means capable of deriving a first impression time display that teaches or suggests a length of time during which the last impression effect of the first effect display is derived, and the second Means C-1 to C-2, comprising second impression time display means capable of deriving a second impression time display that teaches or suggests a length of time during which the last impression effect of the effect display is derived; The gaming machine according to any one of C-18.

  In recent years, it has become common for the winning combination on the other side to be more advantageous than the winning side on the other side in the first and the second lottery lottery, and according to means C-19, The first and second impression time displays indicate which of the first variation display and the second variation display is stopped first. For this reason, in addition to the result of the lottery decision, the other one of the first lottery lottery and the second lottery lottery is desired to be stopped and displayed first, and the corresponding effect is desired to be in a desired mode. In particular, it can be found interesting, and it is possible to improve performance and playability.

  Means C-20. An effect indicating that the winning expectation of either the first variation display or the second variation display is high in a state where both the first variation display and the second variation display are performed. It is comprised so that derivation | leading-out is possible, The game machine as described in the means C-19 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the means C-20, when the special game state is won among the first variation display and the second variation display, it is possible to excite the feeling that the variation display which is advantageous to the player is first digested. The interest in the first impression time display and the second impression time display can be increased.

  D. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the start ball entering means provided in the game board, whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player is determined, Variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed by the variable display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, various effects are derived along with the variable display, and the degree of expectation that the special gaming state will occur (winning expectation) varies depending on what kind of effect is derived for the variable display. It has become.

  By the way, in recent years, there has been a tendency for the number of derivations of the effects related to the winning expectation to increase. There are cases where the subsequent development of the variable display and the contents taught by the variable display (result of the lottery decision) can be almost predicted.

  On the other hand, in order to diversify the production, if it is configured so that the production can be derived from the development of the production that has been performed with the progress of the variable display, the player feels uncomfortable with the production. There is a concern that it may be remembered, and as a result, there is a risk that interest will be reduced.

  For example, when the player reaches the latter half of the variable display and the player determines that the variable display cannot be expected based on the effects related to the winning expectation degree derived so far, the player is against the player's expectation. Although a flashy production was selected at the end of the variable display, after all, it seems that the game was `` disconnected '' as expected, deepening the impression that it is not refreshing, There is a risk of lowering.

  Also, for example, when the player reaches the latter half of the variable display and the player determines that the variable display can be greatly expected based on the effects related to the winning expectation derived so far, Contrary to expectation, although a simple production was selected at the end of the variable display, eventually, when there was a development that it was `` winned '' as expected by the player, it deepened the impression that it was not refreshing This may lead to a decrease in interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the production balance.

Means D-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
An effect display means capable of deriving an effect display that starts with the start of the variable display of the special display means and ends with (with the end of) the variable display of the special display means;
Sub-control means for controlling the effect display means based on information from the main control means,
The effect display of the effect display means is configured to be divided into a plurality of scenes, and the result of the success / failure lottery is taught or suggested in the last scene,
A plurality of scene-specific production displays that constitute each scene of the production display are prepared for each scene,
The sub-control means includes
Based on the result of the success / failure lottery, determining the scene-specific effect display of each scene of the effect display,
The time length of the last scene is determined based on the combination of the scene-specific effect display selected in the scene before the last scene in the effect display and the result of the success / failure lottery. Gaming machine.

  According to the means D-1, the time length of the last scene varies depending on what kind of scene-specific effect display has been passed in the scene before the last scene in the effect display. For this reason, for example, in the situation where the last scene is reached and it is felt that the occurrence of a special gaming state can be expected based on the scene-specific effect display derived in the scene before the last scene, the time of the last scene is compared. If the scene-specific effect display derived from the scene before the last scene is longer than the last scene, it should be configured so that the time of the last scene is relatively short in situations where it is felt that the special gaming state cannot be expected. Therefore, it is possible to surely raise the place to be raised, and when it is not necessary to raise the height, it can be completed relatively easily. Therefore, it is possible to provide a last scene that closely matches the image of the player who visually recognizes the effect display, and the game can be progressed without any difficulty.

  Further, the scene-specific effect display of the last scene is basically determined based on the result of the lottery determination in the same manner as the scene-specific effect display of the other scenes. For this reason, for example, by determining the scene-specific effect display of the last scene based only on the combination of the scene-specific effect display selected in the scene before the last scene, the result of the effect display (variable display) It is possible to avoid a situation in which a far-off effect is derived.

  For example, although the effect display is composed of a first scene, a second scene, and a last scene, and is an effect display corresponding to “out”, it happens to be a special game in both the first scene and the second scene. When a scene-specific effect display with a high expectation level (winning expectation level) is selected, it is more certain that a scene-specific effect display with a very high expected expectation level will be selected in the last scene. In the case where there is an effect display for each scene that has been confirmed and won, it can be avoided that it is selected in the last scene. On the other hand, since it is an effect display corresponding to “out”, in the last scene, although the scene-specific effect display of the pattern with high expectation of winning is derived in both the first scene and the second scene. There is a great possibility that a scene-by-scene effect display with a low winning expectation will be derived. By extending the scene-specific effect display of the last scene in this respect, the winning expectation of the scene-specific effect display can be increased, and the winning expectation of the scene-specific effect display of the last scene and the scene up to the previous scene It is possible to alleviate the difference between the expected display and the winning expectation. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress a decrease in game motivation and the like due to a bad effect display flow.

  The “effect display by scene” is a main effect that develops over time for each scene as a whole (from the start to the end of each scene), and a sub-effect that is derived at a time in a given scene. Of these, at least the main effects may be included (scenes where sub-effects are not derived, scenes where the merits of sub-effects are determined by lottery, scenes where sub-effects are always derived, etc. can be set as appropriate). . Moreover, it is good also as the setting (association) of the winning expectation degree which is an expectation degree with respect to generation | occurrence | production of a special game state regarding both a main effect and a sub effect.

Means D-2. The special display means is controlled by the main control means,
The main control means determines the time for the variable display on the special display means based on the result of the success / failure lottery, and the information on the result of the success / failure lottery and the time for the variable display on the special display means Output to the control means,
The sub-control means includes
Based on the result of the success / failure lottery and information on the time of variable display in the special display means, the effect display for each scene of each scene of the effect display is determined,
Based on the combination of the scene-specific effect display selected in the scene before the last scene in the effect display and the result of the success / failure lottery, the time length of the last scene is determined,
The gaming machine according to means D-1, wherein the time of the scene before the last scene is determined based on the length of time of the last scene.

  According to the means D-2, the special display means having an important role of teaching the result of the lottery decision is controlled by the main control means while the sub-control means takes charge of the special display means while controlling the production means. It is possible to ensure the accuracy of display in the means and to complicate and diversify the aspect of the effect means while avoiding an increase in the control burden of the main control means.

  In addition, since the time of the variable display in the special display means (hereinafter referred to as the variable time) is determined by the main control means, the effect display time of the effect display of the effect display means performed in synchronization with the change display in the special display means. Can also be determined by the main control means. Therefore, if the length of the last scene is lengthened within the effect display time determined by the main control means, the sub-control means shortens the time length of the previous scene and increases the time of the last scene. If the length is shortened, the time of the last scene is lengthened, and the time of the last scene is determined by determining the time of the scene before the last scene according to the time of the last scene. However, the effect display of the effect means can be synchronized with the fluctuation display of the special display means.

Means D-3. Corresponding to each scene of the effect display, a plurality of scene-specific effect displays having different winning expectation levels, which are expectations for the occurrence of the special gaming state, are prepared,
Individual expectation degree discriminating means capable of discriminating whether or not the winning expectation degree of the effect display for each scene is high;
A combination expectation degree discriminating means capable of discriminating whether or not the combination of the scene-specific effect display with a high degree of winning expectation is derived in the scene before the last scene in the effect display;
In the last scene, a first time pattern in which the predetermined scene-specific effect display is derived with a normal time length and a second time in which the predetermined scene-specific effect is derived longer than the normal time length Patterns and
It is determined that the combination of the effect-by-scene effect display with the high expected expectation level is derived by the combination expectation level determining unit (and the winning expectation of the scene-by-scene effect display of the last scene is determined by the individual expectation level determining unit. If the degree is low), the last scene is set to the second time pattern,
The time when the scene-specific effect display selected for the last scene is derived with the first time pattern from the time when the scene-specific effect display selected for the last scene is derived with the second time pattern The gaming machine according to means D-2, characterized in that the time of the scene before the last scene is set shorter by the time of subtracting.

  According to the means D-3, in the effect display, when a combination of the scene-specific effect display having a high expected expectation level is derived in the scene before the last scene, the scene-specific effect display pattern of the last scene ( Regardless of the (expected expectation), the last scene time is set relatively long (second time). For this reason, the feelings raised in the scene up to the last scene can be digested by firmly hitting the scene display of the relatively long scene. Can avoid indigestion). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by improving the balance between the effect display and the expected expectation.

Means D-4. The combination expectation level determining means is configured to be able to determine whether or not the combination of the scene-specific effect display with the low expected expectation level is derived in the scene before the last scene in the effect display,
When the combination expectation determination means determines that the combination of the effect-by-scene display with a low expected expectation is derived, the individual expectation determination means performs the scene-by-scene effect display. The game machine according to means D-3, wherein when it is determined that the winning expectation degree is high, the last scene is set to the first time pattern.

  According to the means D-4, in the effect display, if the winning expectation level is not increased in the scene before the last scene, even if the scene-specific effect display having a high expected expectation level is derived in the last scene, The last scene is not lengthened, and a scene-specific effect display of the first time pattern is derived. Accordingly, it is possible to refrain from deriving the scene-specific effect display of the second time pattern in a situation where the player feels excessive (unnecessarily long) in the last scene. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by improving the balance between the effect display and the expected expectation.

  Means D-5. The combination expectation determination means determines that the combination of the scene-specific effect display with the high expected expectation is not derived, and the individual expectation determination means determines the winning expectation of the scene-specific effect display of the last scene. In the case where it is determined that the winning scene is low, when the effect display indicates that the winning lottery has been won, the last scene is compared to the case where it is taught that the winning lottery has not been won. The gaming machine according to means D-4, characterized in that the ratio set in the second time pattern is high.

  According to the means D-5, in the last scene, even if the winning expectation of the scene-specific effect display is low, the winning expectation when the scene-specific effect display is derived with the second time pattern can be further improved. it can. Therefore, when the combination expectation level discriminating means determines that the combination of the scene-specific effect display with a high winning expectation level is derived, a scene-specific effect display with a low winning expectation pattern is derived in the last scene. In such a case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's feelings are lowered no matter how much the scene-specific effect display is performed in the second time pattern.

Means D-6. The effect display by scene is performed with the main effect that develops over time over the whole of each scene (from the start to the end of each scene) and the main effect is interrupted, or at one time of the main effect There is a sub-effect that is performed (displayed) in parallel with the main effect and postpones the derivation of the specific effect in the main effect for a time corresponding to the period performed in parallel,
The time of the last scene is set, the time of the main effect of the scene before the last scene is set, and the remaining time is set as the time of the sub-effect of the scene before the last scene. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-2 to D-5.

  According to the means D-6, when the sub effect is performed, the main effect is interrupted or the derivation timing of the specific effect in the main effect is delayed. Since the effect is performed with the predetermined effect (specific effect) in the main effect, a situation in which the predetermined effect (specific effect) is not derived in the main effect can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which predetermined information (specific effect) in the main effect is skipped or difficult to recognize, and the effect display can be enjoyed more reliably.

Means D-7. The time of the sub effect is a configuration that can be changed after the start of the previous effect moving display,
The gaming machine according to means D-6, wherein the time of the last scene is reset according to the time used in the sub-effect.

  According to the means D-7, the reality of the effect display can be enhanced by the structure of generating the effect display (corresponding to the content) as the effect display proceeds. Further, even when the sub-effect time is determined after the start of the effect display, the end timing of the effect display can be changed by changing the length of the impression effect as in the means A-1. Since it can be matched with the end timing, even in a situation where there is not much time delay, it is possible to accurately adjust the time of the effect display time with a comparative margin.

Means D-8. In the main effect of the last scene, the same movie is repeatedly derived, or the same still image is continuously derived, or the last impression effect in which a predetermined movie is derived in slow motion is performed.
The time of the last impression production in the last scene is changed when the time of the last scene is reset according to the time used in the sub production. Gaming machine.

  According to the means D-8, the impression effect is an effect in which the same moving image is repeatedly derived, or the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion. There is little sense of incongruity even if the period is lengthened or shortened, and control for lengthening the period can be performed relatively easily. Therefore, while making it possible to derive the sub-effect, the effect display of the effect display means can be made to proceed relatively smoothly while improving the performance, and the effect balance can be improved.

  Means D-9. Impression effect that is performed in the main effect of the scene before the last scene and the same movie is repeatedly derived, or the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined movie is derived in slow motion The gaming machine according to means D-7 or D-8, characterized in that the length of time (normal impression effect) is not changed.

  According to the means D-9, the impression effect is an easy-to-understand and impressive effect for the player, and it is easy to count the time from the start to the end. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the flow of the effect display is deteriorated by changing the length of the normal impression effect.

Means D-10. Provided by the player operating so that the player can operate, and when the operation is performed in the operation enabled state, a display corresponding to the display in the effect display unit is derived,
The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-9, wherein the sub-effect includes an operation effect in which an operation effective period in which the operation is enabled is set.

  According to the means D-10, the player's interest in the sub-effect can be increased by deriving the operation effect at the time of the sub-effect. In addition, when the time of the sub-effect is changed depending on the timing when the effect operation means is operated in the operation effective period (there may not be operated), the specific effect can be made smooth by adjusting the time of the impression effect. The variation display and the end timing can be made to coincide with each other.

Means D-11. The operation effect is derived from an operation effect result display that teaches the result of the operation effect based on the operation of the effect operation means.
A plurality of operation methods of the effect operation means that are triggered by the operation effect result display are prepared,
The gaming machine according to means D-10, characterized in that the operation method of the effect operation means to be selected is limited according to the length of time of the sub-effect.

  According to the means D-11, if the operation method of the effect operation means is different, there is a difference in the time until the operation effect result display is derived. For this reason, according to the time of the sub-production, the operation method of the production operation means is set flexibly according to the time of the sub-production. The production can be executed reliably.

  If there is a gap, long press, repeated hits (the maximum number of times is high, the time limit until the end is long), and a timing tap that allows the operation to be performed in accordance with the timing instructed on the gaming machine side (long period) ) Is selected, and if it is desired to shorten the time as much as possible, an operation with a limited number of times, or a timing tap (short period) may be selected.

Means D-12. An information acquisition means for acquiring success / failure related information related to the success / failure lottery when the variable entrance detection means is detected;
A holding storage unit having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the success / failure related information acquired by the information acquisition unit;
A hold display means capable of deriving a hold display indicating that the success / failure related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means,
When the variable entry detecting means is detected during the variation display of the identification information in the special display means, the variation display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is performed with the variation of the identification information being executed. A configuration that is performed after the display,
When the variation display in the special display means ends, a variation interval is set in which the variation display stop mode is held, and after the variation interval ends, the next variation display is started,
The effect display of the effect display means is the result of whether or not the special game state has been won in the winning lottery determined to be taught or suggested in the effect display together with the end of the variable display in the special display means. Taught,
A plurality of types are set in the special gaming state given when winning in the winning / losing lottery,
In the effect display, when teaching that the special gaming state is won is performed, teaching or suggestion of the type of special gaming state to be given is performed,
In the effect display means, when teaching that the special game state is won in the effect display is performed, the type of the special game state taught or suggested in the effect display corresponding to the period of the variable interval The game machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-11, characterized in that a re-lottery effect that may change the game is performed.

  According to the means D-12, it is possible to always synchronize the end timing of the effect display with the end timing of the variable display, and it is possible to reliably execute the subsequent variable interval effect and the like.

Means D-13. A corresponding point storage table for storing a correspondence relationship between the scene-specific effect display and an expected point indicating an expected degree of winning that is an expected degree for occurrence of the special gaming state;
Based on the determination result whether or not the sum of the expected points of the scene-specific effect display selected in the scene before the last scene in the effect display is a specified value or more, and the result of the success / failure lottery, The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-12, wherein the length of time of the last scene is determined.

  According to the means D-13, in order to determine the time of the last scene, the combination of the scene-specific effects display selected in the scene before the last scene in the effect display is not determined one by one, but is determined by points. As a result, simplification of control and the like can be achieved. In particular, when there are a large number of scenes, this effect is more prominent.

Means D-14. Expectation level display means capable of deriving an expected level display visualizing the expected point,
According to the expectation point corresponding to the scene-specific effect display derived with the progress of the effect display, the aspect of the expectation display is changed,
The expectation level display means that an expectation level display indicating that many expectation points are obtained is associated with a long time length of the last scene. A gaming machine according to means D-13.

  According to the means D-14, the winning expectation degree is visualized in the appearance of the expectation level display, which stage of the winning expectation degree is high, and whether the winning lottery corresponding to the effect display is high Etc. become easier to understand. Therefore, it is easy to get attention to the effect display means when an expected level display that can be expected is derived, and an effect with a high expected expectation level is derived even in the middle of a specific effect, It is possible to have an interest in wanting the aspect to be improved. Furthermore, in a situation where the player's expectation is greatly increased, such as when the expectation level display is in a high-winning expectation mode, the last scene is configured to have a longer length of time. However, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's expectation is lost due to the end of the game. As a result, it is possible to more surely prevent the occurrence of stagnation for the production.

  Means D-15. A determination result as to whether or not a specific scene-specific effect display is selected in a plurality of predetermined scenes from among the plurality of scene-specific effect displays prepared corresponding to each scene of the effect display, and the success / failure lottery The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-14, wherein the length of time of the last scene is determined based on the result of the above.

  According to the means D-15, it is possible to prevent the gameability from being overturned, such as whether or not the winning expectation level of the scene-specific effect display of each scene is high.

  The means A, means B, means C, and means D can be appropriately combined.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A ball ball game machine including a game area where a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general winning device, variable winning device, operation port, etc.) arranged in the game region.

  b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a bullet ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface) that is guided along the substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning device, And a ball game machine configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area.

  c. The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the above ball game machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Variable winning device, 33a ... First starting winning device, 33b ... Second starting winning device, 34 ... Through gate, 42 ... Decorative symbol display device, 43a ... First special display device, 43b ... First 2 special display devices, 261... Main control device, 262.

Claims (6)

Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is established;
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and when the winning lottery is selected, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means;
Special display means for performing a variable display of the identification information that teaches the result of the lottery determination,
Effect display means capable of deriving an effect display that starts with the start of the variable display of the special display means and ends with the end of the variable display of the special display means;
Sub-control means for controlling the effect display means based on information from the main control means,
In the effect display, a result teaching effect that teaches or suggests the result of the lottery at the end of the effect display, and a last impression effect that is performed immediately before the result teaching effect,
The length of time of the last impression effect is associated with a winning expectation that is an expectation for occurrence of the special gaming state with a predetermined variation display,
An gaming machine comprising: an impression time display means capable of deriving an impression time display that teaches or suggests a length of time from which the last impression effect is derived.   The impression time display is configured to be derived before and after the start of the last impression effect, and when derived after the start of the last impression effect, with the end of the last impression effect, The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is configured to indicate that the remaining time of the last impression effect has disappeared. Provided by the player operating so that the player can operate, and when the operation is performed during the operation effective period, the display device for the display corresponding to the display of the display is derived.
The operation impression in which the operation effective period is set in the last impression effect is configured to be derived,
When the operation operation means is operated in the operation effect derived to the last impression effect, a specific effect associated with the winning expectation degree is derived, and the impression time display is the last impression effect. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the derivation time of the game machine is changed to a mode of shortening.   2. The impression time display is configured to sequentially change from an aspect indicating that the remaining period is large to an aspect indicating that there is no remaining period as the effect display progresses. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3. A game area in which a game ball launched by the launching device is guided; and
First starting entrance means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and second starting entrance means,
First starting entrance detecting means capable of detecting a game ball entering the first starting entrance means;
Second starting entrance detecting means capable of detecting a game ball entering the second starting entrance means;
Variable ball entry means configured to be able to change between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter,
When detection by the first starting entrance detection means is performed, a first winning / notifying lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special game state that opens the variable entering means is performed, and the first winning / notifying lottery First special game generation means as the main control means for generating the special game state when winning
A first special symbol display means as the special display means for performing a first variation display by a first special symbol that teaches the result of the first winning / losing lottery;
When the detection by the second starting entry detecting means is performed, a second winning / notifying lottery is performed for determining whether or not to generate a special game state for opening the variable entering means. Second special game generating means as the main control means for generating the special game state when winning the game,
A second special symbol display means as the special display means for performing a second variation display by a second special symbol that teaches the result of the second winning / losing lottery,
The first variation display in the first special symbol display means and the second variation display in the second special symbol display means can be executed in parallel,
The effect display means is configured to be able to derive a first effect display corresponding to the first variation display and a second effect display corresponding to the second variation display,
As the impression time display means,
First impression time display means capable of deriving a first impression time display that teaches or suggests a length of time during which the last impression effect of the first effect display is derived;
2. A second impression time display means capable of deriving a second impression time display that teaches or suggests a length of time during which the last impression effect of the second effect display is derived. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 4.   An effect indicating that the winning expectation of either the first variation display or the second variation display is high in a state where both the first variation display and the second variation display are performed. The game machine according to claim 5, wherein the game machine is configured to be derived.

Images